Owner's Manual

ManualsBrandsLG Manualscomputers & electronicsLGP936

User Guide

LG-P936

P/N : MFL67527207 (1.0)

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

LG-P936

P/N : MFL67527207 (1.0)

www.lg.comwww.lg.com

ENGLISH

ﯽﺳﺭﺎﻓ

ﻲﺑﺮﻋ

ﯽﺳﺭﺎﻓ

ENGLISH

Summary of content (482 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ ENGLISH ENGLISH ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ LG-P936 www.lg.com P/N : MFL67527207 (1.0) H User Guide LG-P936 P/N : MFL67527207 (1.0) H www.lg.
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ LG-P936‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫‪.www.lg.com‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﹸﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ‪www.lg.com‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﻔﻮﻓﻴﻦ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ .Copyright ©2012 LG Electronics, Inc‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ LG .‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ LG‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ LG Group‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 4
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪8 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪.......................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻚ‪17 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ‪...................................‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ‪26 ............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪29 .............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪29 .................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪31 .........
PAGE 5
‫‪54....................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪.................................... Google‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪54................................. Google‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪55...............Google‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪57 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.....................................‬‬ ‫‪57......................................................Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪58 ........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪61 ...........
PAGE 6
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ‪82 ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪82 ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪82 ........................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﲢﺪﻳﺜﻬﺎ ‪83 ...............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪84 .................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ‪84 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪85 .......................................
PAGE 7
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‪100 .....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪101 ................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪101 ....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪102 ............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪102 .............................................
PAGE 8
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪121 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪121 ......................................................‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪122 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪124 ............................................................................‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‪124 ..............................................................
PAGE 9
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪14 ...........................................................‬‬ ‫‪142‬‬ ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪...........................................................‬‬ ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪142 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﶈﻤﻮﻝ ‪ LG‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫)‪142....................................................(OTA‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪144 .............................‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.............................‬‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ DivX‬ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﶈﻤﻮﻝ‪144 ..............................
PAGE 10
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﺪ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﹰ ﺧﻄﺮﺍ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﺽ ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﹼﺪﺩ )‪ .(SAR‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪ LG-P936‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 11
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ DASY4‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻫﻲ ‪0.567‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻁ‪/‬ﻛﺠﻢ )‪ 10‬ﺟﺮﺍﻣﺎﺕ( ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ 0.872‬ﻭﺍﻁ‪/‬ﻛﺠﻢ )‪ 10‬ﺟﺮﺍﻣﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻘﻴﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺈﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 1.5‬ﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﺪﻥ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 1.5‬ﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺴﻤﻚ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻲ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻔﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﻩ ‪ LG‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻏﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓﹰ ﺃﻡ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺓﹰ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.
PAGE 13
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ )ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻨﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺛﺎﺙ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﹼﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺬﺍﻛﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ؛ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺣﺎﺩ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﹼﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﹼﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﺫﻥ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﹼﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﻟﻸﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻘﻠﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻻ ﹰ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺭﻛﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻠﺰﻣﺎ ﹰ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﹼﺐ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﻤﻌﻚ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﹼﺿﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﻤﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺫﻧﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻝ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﹺﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗ ﹼﺘﺴﻢ ﺃﺟﻮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓﹰ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔﹰ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫• ﻟﺴﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ‪ LG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ‪LG‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺨﻠﹼﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﹼﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎ ﹰ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺨﻠﹼﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺬﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻓﺮﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪LG‬‬ ‫‪ Electronics‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ!‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﻭﺭﺩ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺻﻄﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ < ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ ﻗﻠﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟـ ™‪Gmail‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ <‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 21
‫‪ .3‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺒﻄﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﻔﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺛﻮﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻕ ‪ .
PAGE 22
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪ PIN‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ﺗﺬﻛﹸﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 23
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ(‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 8‬ﹴ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺪ ﹺﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،micro SD‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ ‪ .7‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ micro SD‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ micro SD‬ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .micro SD‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ micro SD‬ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ micro SD‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ .USB‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪micro‬‬ ‫‪ ،SD‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ )ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪ ،SMS‬ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ(‬ ‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻭﺇﺳﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 26
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪ WINDOW PC Sync‬ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪."LG‬‬ ‫‪LG PC Suite‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ "‪Suite‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ microSD‬ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﹺﺻﻞ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﹸﻣﻤﻜﹼﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ‪ LGPCSuiteIV‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ LGInstaller.
PAGE 27
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 3‬ﹴ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻬﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺎ ﹰ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪ .10‬ﺍﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﹴ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ .12 .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬ ‫ﹴ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 3‬ﹴ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 3‬ﹴ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ ﺗﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬‫ﺭﺃﺳﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺛﻘﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺗﻌﺬ ﹼﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺛﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪ 3.5‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺯﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩ ﹺﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SIM‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃ ﹼﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ )ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﻭ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ‪) USB‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪/‬ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﻳﺘﺠﻪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﺵ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎ ﹰﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻜﻴﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ )‪ TA‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ ،(USB‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ LED‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .
PAGE 35
‫‪ 1‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪micro SD‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ micro SD‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃ ﹼﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪micro SD‬‬ ‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ micro SD‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Android OS 2.3‬ﻭ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻮﻕ ‪Play‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ micro SD‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﺖ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻧﻈﺮﹰﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ micro SD‬ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻮﺃ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ micro SD‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻠﺤﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺿﺮﺭ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.micro SD‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،micro SD‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﹰ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪.SD‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ < SD‬ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪SD‬‬ ‫‪.SD‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺩﺧﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺷﻲﺀ‪ .
PAGE 38
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪MHL‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﹰﺍ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇ ﹼﻥ ‪) MHL‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ( ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ .
PAGE 39
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻﹰ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫‪ MHL‬ﻣﻤﻜﹼﻨ ﹰﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ًّ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻﹰ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ‪ ،MHL‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﹸﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺇﺻﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .
PAGE 41
‫ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻄﺎ ﻣﺰﺩﻭ ﹰﺟﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻌﻴﻦ ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﻀﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺒﻌﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ -‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺴﺲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ .
PAGE 43
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫"ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ"‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺛﻤﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﹼﺐ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ )ﻣﺜﻼﹰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﻟﺨﻤﺲ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﹰ ﺳﻬﻼ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ )ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ( ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺟﺰ ﹰﺀﺍ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ‪) .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﻣﻮﺯﻫﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍ ﹰ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﹰﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪GPS‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﺮﻛﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫< ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ )ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ( ﻭ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﻭ ‪ GPS‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺳﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﻛﺘﻢ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺒﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
PAGE 49
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ Gmail‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻦ ‪GPS‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ Google talk‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ GPS‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ On-Screen Phone‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﻗﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻧﺸﻂ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻧﺸﻄﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ - LG‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ - QWERTY‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪48‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ - Shift‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺨﻂ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .
PAGE 51
‫ﺑﺄﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ //‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪.LG‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ‪ -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ‪ -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ - LG‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪QWERTY‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ - Alt‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‪ //‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪.LG‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ‪ -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ‪ -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ - Shift‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺨﻂ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ‪ -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ //‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪.LG‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ - Shift‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻄﺎ ﻣﺰﺩﻭ ﹰﺟﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺨﻂ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺒﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ //‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 123‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ "‪.("á‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‬ ‫ﹴ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪Qwerty‬‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ "‪."a‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Google‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ < Gmail‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ < ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍ ™‪.Gmail‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻧﺺ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻤﻚ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 57
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ™‪Gmail‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Google‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺎ ﺇﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ ،Google‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ‪) .‬ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ ،Google‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ GmailTM‬ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭ ‪Google‬‬ ‫‪ Calendar‬ﻭﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ .
PAGE 58
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﹼﺐ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪Gmail‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ™ﺳﻮﻕ ‪.Play‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ enterprise‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ "ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ"‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺆﻣﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ‬‫ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﺰﹰﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪58‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ WEP‬ﻭ‪ WPA/WPA2- PSK‬ﻭ ‪WPA‬‬ ‫‪ PSK‬ﻭ ‪ WPA2 PSK‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭ ‪) .802.
PAGE 61
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ < ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻟﻼﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ )ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ‪ – 0 0 0 0‬ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺻﻔﺎﺭ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ ..‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ <‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻥ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪ FTP‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫* ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ ‪) FTP‬ﺇﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ(‪:(:‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ <‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ .
PAGE 63
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪DataPro‬‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ .
PAGE 64
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺫﻱ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺷﺎﺭﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫< ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ < ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ < ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ Wi-fi‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.
PAGE 65
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ <‬ ‫< ‪Wi-Fi Direct‬‬ ‫‪
PAGE 66
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Smartshare‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ SmartShare‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪) DLNA‬ﺗﺤﺎﻟﻒ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻮﺭﺓ( ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪DLNA‬‬ ‫ﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ SmartShare‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫<‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪64‬‬ ‫‪SmartShare‬‬ ‫‪.SmartShare‬‬ ‫< ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻣﺜﻼﹰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ( ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ )ﻣﺜﻼﹰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ(‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ DLNA‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ )ﻛﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺜﻼ ﹰ(‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.SmartShare‬‬ ‫‪SmartShare‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ‬ ‫<‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .SmartShare‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ < ‪SmartShare‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪SmartShare‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ .
PAGE 69
‫‪ 3‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺃﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ "‪ "+‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ )ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ( ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺬﺍﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﹰﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﻧﻴﻨﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺮﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺬﺍﺭ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺬﺍﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﹰﺍ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﺍﳌﻜﺎﳌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﻭﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪72‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻲ ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺇﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﺡ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ SMS‬ﻭ ‪ MMS‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ )‪ SMS‬ﻭ ‪ (MMS‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‪ .
PAGE 77
‫ﺍﺳﻢ‪/‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺩﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺸﺄ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ‪ 160‬ﺣﺮﻓﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻠ ﹴﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ SMS‬ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ،SMS‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪MMS‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺘﻔﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ SMS‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺼ ﹸﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫< ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻓﺮﻱ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ‬ ‫‪ .Gmail‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ POP3:‬ﻭ ‪ IMAP‬ﻭ‪Microsoft‬‬ ‫‪) Exchange ActiveSync‬ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ‪.(Enterprise‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )‪ (IMAP ،POP3‬ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ – ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ – ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﺍﻻﺳﻢ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ – POP3 / IMAP4‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪ POP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪.IMAP4‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ – ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ – ‪/TLS/SSL‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺋﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‪/‬ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ‪/‬ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Exchange‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ؛ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪ Exchange‬ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺭﺳﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ )ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ‪ .
PAGE 83
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺪﻭﹼﻧﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺻﺪﻗﺎﺋﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ‪ Facebook‬ﻭ ‪ Twitter‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ Myspace‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻬﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﹸﻔﺮﺽ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻌﺎ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ؛ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ )ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺸﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺘﻚ )ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺗﻚ( ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﻥ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪ .
PAGE 87
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤ ﹼﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫< ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ – ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ – ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ – ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻪ‪ .
PAGE 88
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ – ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.88‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ – ﺣﺮﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ – ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ – ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ ﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .
PAGE 89
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﹼﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﻳﺪﻙ ﻋﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪MMS‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛـ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛـ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪88‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .
PAGE 91
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ – ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ )ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫)‪8M(3264X2448)،، W6M(3264X1836‬‬ ‫)‪8M(3264X2448‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪W6M(3264X1836)، :‬‬ ‫)‪5M(2560X1920)،، 3M(2048X1536‬‬ ‫)‪5M(2560X1920‬‬ ‫‪3M(2048X1536)،‬‬ ‫)‪W3M(2304X1296)،، 1M(1280X960‬‬ ‫)‪W3M(2304X1296‬‬ ‫‪1M(1280X960)،‬‬ ‫)‪.W1M(1536X864‬‬ ‫)‪W1M(1536X864‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ – ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.
PAGE 92
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ – ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ – ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ – ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ – ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 93
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫• ﻟﺪﻯ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻘﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻮﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﹼﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 94
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪92‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ < ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛـ <‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﹼﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤ ﹼﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ -‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪ -‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ – ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﹼﺭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‘‘‪ ’’-‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‘‘‪ ’’+‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﹰ‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ – ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺧﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.96‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ – ﺣﺮﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ – ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ – ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 97
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺮﻙ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﹼ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ‪ REC‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 98
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺠﻠﺘﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 99
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ – ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻠﺘﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﻮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫– ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪﻙ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ micro SD‬ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪98‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ .
PAGE 101
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‪ ..‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛـ ﻭﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﹴ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ <‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛـ‬ ‫ﻛـ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ <‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .
PAGE 103
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ < ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ < USB‬ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ ،USB‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ "ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ "USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ" )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎﺎ(‪.
PAGE 104
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ )ﻣﻠﻒ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ smi.‬ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ(‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ .
PAGE 105
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺧﻔﻀﻪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﻛﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪ ،Google‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ Gmail‬ﻭ ‪ Google Talk‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ Google Calendar‬ﻭ ‪ Google Maps‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ .Google‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪106‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﺂﺕ‪ .
PAGE 109
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﻭﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 110
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭﻙ؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻨﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻷﻣﺎﻛﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻨﻲ‪.
PAGE 111
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﻀﻤﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻢ ﺩﻋﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎﺀ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﻋﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺻﺪﻗﺎﺋﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﻀﻤﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﻀﻤﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻨﻀﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ‪ Google‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﻀﻤﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ"ﺍﻻﻧﻀﻤﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﻀﻤﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺃﺻﺪﻗﺎﺋﻚ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺗﻬﻢ‪.
PAGE 112
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻠﻘﻮﻥ ﻃﻠ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻮﻧﻮﺍ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻧﻀﻤﻮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻠﻘﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﻳ ﹰﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻋﻮﺗﻬﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺮﻯ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ "ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 113
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ™ﺳﻮﻕ ‪Play‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ™ﺳﻮﻕ ‪ Play‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻵﻻﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ‬ ‫ﹴ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ ™ﺳﻮﻕ ‪ ،Play‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺳﻮﻕ ‪ Play‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ‪.
PAGE 114
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﹴﺬ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ™‪ .Google Checkout‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻌﻴﺪﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 115
‫ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﺩﺛﺎﺕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟـ ™‪.Gmail‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ™‪Gmail‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ < ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Gmail‬‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .
PAGE 116
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪Google‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫– ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫– ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺩﻋﻮﺗﻬﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻈﻮﺭﻳﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻈﺮﻫﻢ‪.
PAGE 117
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎﺋﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻪ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﺪﻗﺎﺅﻙ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻲ ﻟـ ‪ AndroidTM‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻤﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎﺀ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Google Talk‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪.Android‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‬ ‫‪Google Talk‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.
PAGE 118
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪116‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫)ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.
PAGE 119
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪ .
PAGE 120
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Polaris Office‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ‪ ،Polaris Office‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪micro‬‬ ‫‪ SD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Polaris Office‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪،xlsx ،xls ،docx ،doc ،txt :‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 121
‫‪ 7‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫< ﺣﻔﻆ < ﺣﻔﻆ )ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ( ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪.Polaris‬‬ ‫< ‪Polaris Office‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.micro SD‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.
PAGE 122
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ )‪ Word‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Excel‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪.(PowerPoint file‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪ ..‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻟﺘﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 123
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫"ﻗﻞ ﺃﻣﺮﹰﺍﺍ"‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻼﻣﻚ‪.
PAGE 124
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ‪.
PAGE 125
‫ﺑﻤﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 126
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻔﻌﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫> ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ <‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻬﻞ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫‪124‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 127
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻻﺣﻘﹰ ﺎ ‪ -‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻻﺣﻘﹰ ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻟـ ‪ – RSS‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺐ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ‪.Google‬‬ ‫ﺇ ﹼﻥ ‪ (Really Simple Syndication) RSS‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﺰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺷﺄﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻭﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ‪.
PAGE 128
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ – ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ – ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺺ – ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻀﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻠﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﺼﻘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ – ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ – ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ – ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫‪126‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 129
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.
PAGE 130
‫‪On-Screen Phone‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ On-Screen Phone 2.0‬ﻣﻦ ‪LG‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ‪ On-Screen Phone‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ‪On-Screen Phone‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪) On-Screen Phone‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ‪ LG Home Panorama‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪.On-Screen Phone‬‬ ‫‪128‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪.
PAGE 131
‫)ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ (Polaris Office‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ(‪:(:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺳﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪.on-Screen phone‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ‪.
PAGE 132
‫‪On-Screen Phone‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ On-Screen Phone 2.0‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻ ﹰ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.OSP‬‬ ‫‪130‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪On-Screen‬‬ ‫‪ Phone‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ <‬ ‫‪.On-Screen Phone‬‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺪ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪On-Screen‬‬ ‫‪ Phone‬ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.
PAGE 133
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.On-Screen Phone‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫‪ .On-Screen Phone‬ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ" < ""ﻓﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‬ ‫‪ On-Screen Phone‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ"‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ""‪Phone‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ" ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ .""On-Screen‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ""ﻗﻄﻊ‬ ‫‪On-Screen Phone‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 134
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪ .VPN‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫< ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 135
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ" ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ "ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫"ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ – Wi-Fi Direct‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫‪ .Wi-Fi Direct‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Wi-Fi Direct‬ﻭﺍﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ – ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺎ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﺇﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬‫ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 136
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻬﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ‪ -‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻤﻼﺀﻣﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ ﻭﺑﻴﺌﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪134‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 137
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ – ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ – ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ – ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ – ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ -‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻃﻔﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ LED‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.
PAGE 138
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ – ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .
PAGE 139
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ – ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ – ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ – ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ – SD‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.micro SD‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ – ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 140
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ﺗﺬﻛﹸﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺑـ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺪﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 141
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺼﻠﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺳﻮﻕ ‪.
PAGE 142
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ – ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ – ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪140‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .micro SD‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﹰ‬ ‫‪ micro SD‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 143
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻗﺎﺑﻼ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ - USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺭﺟﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻛﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪ - On-Screen Phone‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ .On-Screen Phone‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ On-Screen Phone‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 144
‫ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ‪/http://www.lg.com :‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﹰﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 145
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ LG‬ﺑﺤﻖ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ -‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻭﺃﻱ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﻭﺃﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬ ‫‪ ،DRM‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ‪ LG‬ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .
PAGE 146
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Open Source‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ GPL‬ﻭ‪ LGPL‬ﻭ‪ MPL‬ﻭﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪/http://opensource.lge.com‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻭﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺧﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ DivX‬ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ :DIVX VIDEO‬ﺇﻥ ‪ ®DivX‬ﻫﻮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻪ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ،LLC ،DivX‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟـ ‪Rovi‬‬ ‫‪144‬‬ ‫®‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 147
‫‪ ®DivX‬ﻭ ‪ ®DivX Certified‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Rovi Corporation‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Dolby Mobile‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻌﻪ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ‪Dolby Laboratories.‬‬ ‫‪ Dolby‬ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺮﻓﺎ ‪ D‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻟـ ‪.
PAGE 148
‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪(.(.‬‬ ‫)ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪) .LG-P936‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪ LG-P936‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪.LG-P936‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 149
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ Declaration of Conformity Suppliers Details Name LG Electronics Inc Address LG Twin Tower 20,Yeouido-dong, Yeongdeungpo-gu Seoul, Korea 150-721 Product Details Product Name GSM 850 / E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Quad Band , WCDMA and LTE Terminal Equipment Model Name LG-P936 Trade Name LG Applicable Standards Details R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC EN 301 489-01 V1.8.1 / EN 301 489-7 V 1.3.1/ EN 301 489-17 V 2.1.1 / EN 301 489-19 V 1.2.1 / EN 301 489-24 V1.5.
PAGE 150
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻚ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﹼﻞ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 151
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﹺﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃ ﹼﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﹼﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.
PAGE 152
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺮﹼﺡ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪.PIN2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﻮﻉ ﻣﻘﺪ ﹰﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺮﻫﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 153
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇ ﹼﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻗﺘﻀﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 154
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪ /‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪ SMS‬ﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﺗﻠﻘﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪152‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪،FAT16‬‬ ‫‪ FAT32‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 155
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻤﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺇ ﹼﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ ﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﹰ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‪.
PAGE 156
PAGE 157
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫‪ LG-P936‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮی ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ‪ www.lg.com‬ﺑﺎﺯﺩﯾﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﺑﯿﻨﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻖ ﮐﭙﯽ ©‪ .LG Electronics، Inc 2012‬ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ LG .
PAGE 158
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‪8 ........................‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ‪........................‬‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ‪17 ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ‪26 ......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ‪29 ..................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪29 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪31 ................................................................
PAGE 159
‫ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‪54 .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ‪.................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‪54 ................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‪55 .............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ‪57 ..............................‬‬ ‫‪57......................................................Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪58 ........................................................................
PAGE 160
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ ‪83 ................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪83 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪84 ............................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ‪84 ...............................‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪85 ..........................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪86 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‪87 .............................
PAGE 161
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ‪102...................................... USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‪103 .................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‪/‬ﻭﯾﺪﺋﻮﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪104 .........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‪/‬ﻭﯾﺪﺋﻮﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪104 .........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‪105 ............................................................
PAGE 162
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪125 .............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪125 ............................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪126 ........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺏ ‪128 ................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ‪128 .....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪129 ..............................................
PAGE 163
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‪14 ......................................................‬‬ ‫‪147‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪147 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ‪ LG‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ )‪147..............................(OTA‬‬ ‫ﲡﺎﺭی‪149 ..........................................‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﲡﺎﺭی‪..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ‪149.................................
PAGE 164
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﹰ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﯾﺖ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺿﺮﺭﻫﺎﯾﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻧﻘﺾ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﯿﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻧﺮژی ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭﯾﮋﻩ )‪ .(SAR‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ LG-P936‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .
PAGE 165
‫)‪ ،(ICNIRP‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﮐﯿﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﮔﺮﻡ ﺑﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﺪﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ SAR‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫‪ DASY4‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺵ ‪ 0.567‬ﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮ ﮐﯿﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ )‪ 10‬ﮔﺮﻡ( ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺪﻥ ‪ 0.872‬ﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮ ﮐﯿﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ )‪ 10‬ﮔﺮﻡ(‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩی ﺭﻭی ﮔﻮﺵ ﯾﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪1.5‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮی ﺑﺪﻥ ﺗﺒﻌﯿﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 166
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﮐﯿﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﮑﻨﺴﯿﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻤﯿﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻼﺣﺪﯾﺪ ‪ LG‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻤﯿﺮ ﯾﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﯾﺎ ﺑﻮﺭﺩﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﯾﺎ ﺑﻮﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩی ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﺷﺪﻩ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 167
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ )ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻟﻬﺎی ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻨﺰﯾﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﯿﻨﺮ ﯾﺎ ﺍﻟﮑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺛﺎﺛﯿﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻬﻮﯾﻪ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻭﺩ ﯾﺎ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻏﻠﯿﻆ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭی ﯾﺎ ﺑﻠﯿﻂ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﯿﺴﯽ ﺗﺄﺛﯿﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﻭﺳﺎﯾﻞ ﻧﻮک ﺗﯿﺰ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﻧﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 168
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﯿﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﯿﮑﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﯿﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﯿﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﺗﺠﻬﯿﺰﺍﺕ ﭘﺰﺷﮑﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﹰ ﺩﺭ ﺟﯿﺐ ﺟﻠﻮی ﭘﯿﺮﺍﻫﻦ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﯾﻞ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﯾﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 169
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﮐﯿﺴﻪ ﻫﻮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﯿﺰﺍﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﯾﺎ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻧﻌﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﯿﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺟﺪی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺧﯿﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 170
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺳﺨﺖ ﯾﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺷﯿﺸﻪ‬ ‫ﺍی ﺑﺸﮑﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺷﯿﺸﻪ ﺍی ﺷﮑﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺷﮑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﯿﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﯾﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﻋﺎﯾﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﯿﻪ ﻗﻮ ﺍﻧﯿﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﭘﯿﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 171
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﯿﻤﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺯﻣﯿﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﮐﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﺩﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺑﻠﻌﯿﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﺒﺎﯾﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭی ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﮑﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .
PAGE 172
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﯽ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﯾﺎﺩی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﹰ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻔﯿﺪ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﯾﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﯿﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﯾﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 173
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ!‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ﯾﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﻥ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮی ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 174
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﯾﮏ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ‬‫ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ™‪ ،Gmail‬ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ‪،‬‬‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻧﯿﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ‬‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ < ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ < ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 175
‫ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫• ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻏﯿﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫‪ Play‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﻄﺎی ﺟﺪی ﺭﺥ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .
PAGE 176
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﮐﺪ ﭘﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﯾﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺍﺣﺘﯿﺎﻁ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺑﺴﭙﺎﺭﯾﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ‪ 5‬ﻓﺮﺻﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﯾﺪ ﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﯾﺪ‬ ‫‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 177
‫‪ 3‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ‪ --‬ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﻟﻐﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﯿﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪micro SD‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ micro SD‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 178
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﯾﮏ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ micro SD‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .
PAGE 179
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻬﻢ ‪LG PC Suite IV‬‬ ‫• ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫• ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫)ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ‪ ،‬ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ‪ ،SMS‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﯾﺎﺏ ﻫﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ(‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی )ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ( ﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﺸﯿﺪﻥ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ < ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ < ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻝ )‪ (LG-P936‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 180
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ‪ LGPCSuiteIV‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ‪ LGInstaller.exe‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪ LG PC Suite IV‬ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻏﯿﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪LG PC Suite IV‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﯾﺎ ﭘﺎک ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 181
‫ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .11‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻧﺪﺍﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺷﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .12‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺥ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ 12‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ 3‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 182
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 3‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 3‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 183
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺳﻨﮕﯿﻦ ﺭﻭی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻦ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﮐﺶ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻧﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬‫ﯾﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ 5 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 184
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﮏ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ‪ 3.5‬ﻣﯿﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮی‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‪/‬ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﺎی ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﯿﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬‫ﻭ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ‬‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ‪.
PAGE 185
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻮک ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻃﻼﯾﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 186
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻃﻼﯾﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎﯾﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ )ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‪ .‬ﮐﻤﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 187
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ( ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‪/‬ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﹰ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 188
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪micro SD‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﯾﮏ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺧﺮﺍﺵ ﻧﺪﻫﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﻧﺮﺳﺎﻧﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﯿﻔﺘﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺿﻌﯿﻒ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﯾﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ )‪ TA‬ﯾﺎ ‪ ،(USB‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ‪ LED‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 189
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ ،micro SD‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ micro SD‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .
PAGE 190
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪micro SD‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ micro SD‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ‪ Android OS 2.3‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Play‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫‪ micro SD‬ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﯿﻦ ﺩﻟﯿﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺪﻫﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎ ﺭﺥ ﺩﻫﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ micro SD‬ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﯽ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺪﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫‪ micro SD‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 191
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ microSD‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﺎک ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ < ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ <‬ ‫ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 192
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻏﯿﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻏﯿﺮﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬‫ﯾﮏ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﯿﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪/‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ < ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭی ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 193
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ‪ HDTV‬ﮐﻪ ‪ MHL‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ HDTV‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ‪ MHL‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﮕﺮ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪ MHL-HDMI‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 194
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺢ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ‪ -‬ﯾﮏ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﯿﻨﮏ ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 195
‫ﻭﺏ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﻭ‬ ‫ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ )ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ( ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺷﺴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺩﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮﯾﯽ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻓﯿﺰﯾﮑﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 196
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻏﯿﺮﻋﻤﺪی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﯿﺮی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪ LG-P936‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﯽ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﯿﺮی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﯿﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 197
‫ﯾﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﯿﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 5‬ﺧﻄﺎی ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺥ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﯾﺪ‬ ‫‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﯾﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 198
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﯾﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻓﻮﺭی ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻧﯿﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﯾﺎﺏ ﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 199
‫‪ 4‬ﺭﻭی ﯾﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﯾﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﯾﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Play‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 200
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺧﯿﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭی ﯾﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ‪ ،‬ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﺜﻼ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺴﺘﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻟﯿﺴﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﯿﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 201
‫< ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺟﺎ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ )ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ(‪ ،Wi-Fi ،‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ GPS ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﻧﻈﯿﺮ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﹰ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺑﯿﻨﯿﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 202
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﯿﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ GPS‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪GPS‬‬
PAGE 203
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫‪ LG On-Screen Phone‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺁﻫﻨﮕﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﯾﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎ ‪ USB‬ﻭ ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 204
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ - LG‬ﮐﻮﺭﺗﯽ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭی ﯾﮏ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ – shift‬ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻌﺪی ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 205
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ -‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ ،LG‬ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ -‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ -‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‪.
PAGE 206
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ‪ -‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺑﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ ،LG‬ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ -‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ -‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﻌﺪی ‪ -‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‪.
PAGE 207
‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ – shift‬ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻌﺪی ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ -‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ -‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ ،LG‬ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ -‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‪.
PAGE 208
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ – shift‬ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻌﺪی‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﯾﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﯾﮏ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ -‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ 123‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ ،LG‬ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪.
PAGE 209
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﮐﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻓﺮﺍﻧﺴﻮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﯾﮋﻩ ﻓﺮﺍﻧﺴﻮی ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫)ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ "‪.("á‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻪ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻧﺎﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻪ ﻭﯾﮋﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮐﻮﺭﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﮐﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ "‪ "a‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﮐﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 210
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﮐﯽ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ < Gmail‬ﺑﻌﺪی < ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭی‪Gmail‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺩﻭﯾﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ™‪ Gmail‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺭﻭی ﯾﮏ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .
PAGE 211
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ™‪ Gmail‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺏ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ ،GmailTM‬ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫‪ Picasa‬ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 212
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ Gmail‬ﯾﺎ ‪ TM‬ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ‪،Play‬‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺷﺮﮐﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ IT‬ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺻﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 213
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ < ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﯿﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﯾﺎ "ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ" ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺳﺘﯿﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺳﺘﯿﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﯾﺎ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺘﯽ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﭘﯿﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 214
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺘﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ‬‫ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﯾﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﺩی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪58‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪WEP، WPA/WPA2- PSK، WPA‬‬ ‫‪ PSK، WPA2 Only PSK‬ﻭ ‪ 802.
PAGE 215
‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ < ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺭﻭی ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻭ ﮐﺪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‬ ‫)ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺮ ‪ ،(0 0 0 0 -‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 216
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﯾﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک < ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 217
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ‪Bluetooth 3.0‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﺯ ‪ Bluetooth SIG‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ‪ Bluetooth SIG‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ‬‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ < ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ < ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﯾﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 120‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﯾﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 218
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪62‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ‬ ‫ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍی ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ‪DataPro‬‬‫ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ DataPro‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﯿﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺍﯾﯽ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻭ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎ ‪ ،USB‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ‬‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪ micro SD‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 219
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ‪DataPro‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ DataPro‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﯿﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺍﯾﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻭ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﯾﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 220
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ Directed‬ﯾﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫< ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .
PAGE 221
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫< ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﯾﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﭘﺬﯾﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﻥ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی‬‫ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 222
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ DLNA‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﻣﺜﻼ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ(‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫< ‪SmartShare‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﯾﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 223
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﯿﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻪ ‪ DLNA‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫)ﻣﺜﻼ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ‪ DMP‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪DLNA‬‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 224
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﯿﺢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫< ‪SmartShare‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 225
‫ﲤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﯾﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ "‪ "+‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 226
‫ﲤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ ﻭ ﯾﮏ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﭘﯿﺎﻣﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻋﺬﺭﺧﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻧﺎﺷﻨﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻋﺬﺭﺧﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﭘﯿﺎﻣﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻋﺬﺭﺧﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ‪ .
PAGE 227
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺭﻭی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﯾﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﯾﺪ ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 228
‫ﲤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﺪﺍﯾﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﯿﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 229
‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﻭ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﯾﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﯾﮑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 230
‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺭﻭی ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﺎﮐﺴﺘﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺁﯾﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭی ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 231
‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‪/‬ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺒﯽ ﺍﺯ ‪ SMS‬ﻭ ‪ MMS‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻨﻮی‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺯﻧﺠﯿﺮﻩ ﺍی‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ )‪ SMS‬ﻭ ‪ (MMS‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻤﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﮔﻔﺘﮕﻮی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﮏ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﯾﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﯾﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .
PAGE 232
‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‪/‬ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﯾﮏ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺭﻣﺰﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ‪ SMS‬ﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪ 160‬ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻪ ﺍی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺸﻮﺭی ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 233
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﭘﯿﺎ‬ ‫< ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﯾﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺩﻭﯾﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 234
‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‪/‬ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ – SSL‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ SSL‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫‪ Microsoft Exchange‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ )‪(POP3، IMAP‬‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ‪ -‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ – ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﮑﻤﯿﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ "ﻧﺎﻡ" ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺩﺭ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ – POP3 / IMAP4‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﺮﻭﺗﮑﻞ‪ POP3 ،‬ﯾﺎ ‪ IMAP4‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪ -‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 235
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫< ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﮏ ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‪:‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﯾﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﮐﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 236
‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‪/‬ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﯾﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪80‬‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﯿﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﭙﯽ ﯾﺎ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ‪/‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﮐﭙﯽ‪/‬ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺍﯾﻤﻞ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﮐﭙﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 237
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ‪ Exchange‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ؛ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ‪ Exchange‬ﺑﺎﻗﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ )ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‪/‬ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺳﺎﺯی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫< ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ MS Exchange 2‬ﯾﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 238
‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‪/‬ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 239
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ‬ ‫ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻭﺑﻼگ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻮﺍﻣﻊ ﺁﻧﻼﯾﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی ‪ Facebook، Twitter‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ Myspace‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﮐﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﺩﯾﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 240
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﻤﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﯾﮏ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪.
PAGE 241
‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻪ‬‫ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﮕﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻈﺮﯾﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺿﻤﯿﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ )ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ)ﻫﺎی( ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 242
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﯽ‬ ‫" " ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫< ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫< ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻭ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک)ﻫﺎی( ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ )ﺩﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭ( ﺭﻭی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 243
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫< ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ‪ -‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻠﻮ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ‪ -‬ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﯾﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ – ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 244
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ – ﺭﻭی ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 90‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ – ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ – ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺎﻟﺮی – ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﯿﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﯾﺪ‪ .
PAGE 245
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 246
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﻣﯿﻨﮓ‪ ،‬ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ‪ MMS‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﯾﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻥ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪90‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 247
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ – ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ )ﺑﻪ ﭘﯿﮑﺴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭘﯿﮑﺴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫)‪8M(3264X2448)،، W6M(3264X1836‬‬ ‫)‪8M(3264X2448‬‬ ‫‪W6M(3264X1836)،‬‬ ‫)‪5M(2560X1920)،، 3M(2048X1536‬‬ ‫)‪5M(2560X1920‬‬ ‫‪3M(2048X1536)،‬‬ ‫)‪W3M(2304X1296)،، 1M(1280X960‬‬ ‫)‪W3M(2304X1296‬‬ ‫‪1M(1280X960)،‬‬ ‫)‪W1M(1536X864‬‬ ‫)‪.W1M(1536X864‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ – ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 248
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﺌﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺮی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ – ﯾﮏ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ – ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﯿﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ 3 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ‪ 5 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﯾﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎیﻋﺎﺩی‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ – ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻋﺎﺩی‪،‬‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 249
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ <‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ < ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﭘﯿﺶ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺯﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 250
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫‪94‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﯾﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪی ‪ -‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﯾﺎ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﮑﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺵ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺵ‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 251
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ‪ -‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻠﻮ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ‪ -‬ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﯾﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ – ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ "‪ "-‬ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺬﮐﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ "‪ "+‬ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 252
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ – ﺭﻭی ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 98‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ – ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ – ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺎﻟﺮی – ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 253
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺳﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ REC‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﯾﮏ ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ ﻧﯿﺰ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺪﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 254
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﻣﯿﻨﮓ‪ ،‬ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ‪ MMS‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 255
‫ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻮﺋﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺮی‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﯾﮑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ -‬ﯾﮏ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ – ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ –ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 256
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪micro SD‬‬ ‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی ﻭ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﺪﺋﻮﯾﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺎﻟﺮی‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫< ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎی‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺟﺪﻭﻟﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺟﺪﻭﻟﯽ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 257
‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮی ﮔﺎﻟﺮی‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ‪ ..‬ﺭﻭی ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺵ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺵ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 258
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‪ Gmail ،‬ﯾﺎ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺑﻨﻮﯾﺴﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪی ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪی ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﯾﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﯾﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ < ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 259
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪) USB connection mode‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ (USB‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ < ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ <‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ < USB‬ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 260
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‪/‬ﻭﯾﺪﺋﻮﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻭﯾﺪﺋﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍﺷﺪﻧﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 261
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭی ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺭﻭی ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﮑﺚ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﻌﺪی‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻗﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﻢ ﻭ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 262
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺭﻭی ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﯾﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺩﺭ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﯾﺎ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﯾﮏ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 263
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﻖ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﻧﯿﻦ ﻣﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﮑﺜﯿﺮ ﯾﺎ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺧﺬ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﯾﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﯿﻦ ﻣﻠﯽ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﮑﺜﯿﺮ ﻭ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺣﻖ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﯾﺎ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﻧﯿﻦ ﻣﻠﯽ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 264
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ‪Gmail‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‪ ،Google Talk، Google Calendar ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ ،Google Maps‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 265
‫)ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ( ﺭﻭی ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺩﺍﯾﺮﻩ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻻﯾﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻫﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﯾﺎ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﯾﮏ‬ ‫‪‬ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻻﯾﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻻﯾﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻫﻮﺍﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﯾﺎ‬ ‫ﻻﯾﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .
PAGE 266
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ‪ GPS‬ﻭ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺩﻗﯿﻖ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ‬ ‫‪ GPS‬ﻭ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺴﯿﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﺴﯿﺮﻫﺎی ﻟﯿﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺴﯿﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﯿﺮﻫﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺴﯿﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 267
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﯿﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺠﺎﺭی‪ ،‬ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﯿﻦ ﭘﯿﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺘﺎﯾﺞ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺘﺎﯾﺞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ؛ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺭﻭی ﯾﮏ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮی ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 268
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﺋﯽ‬ ‫ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Google LatitudeTM‬‬ ‫‪ Google Latitude‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﯾﮑﺪﯾﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﯿﺎﺑﯿﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺴﯿﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﯿﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ‪Google‬‬ ‫‪ Latitude‬ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.
PAGE 269
‫‪‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻤﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺬﯾﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﯾﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﯾﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 270
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺢ ﻭ ﺣﺘﯽ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫< ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻻﺑﺮﺍﺗﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﯾﻢ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‪.
PAGE 271
‫‪ 3‬ﺭﻭی ﯾﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺮﺗﺮﯾﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻏﯿﺮﺭﺍﯾﮕﺎﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍﯾﮕﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻏﯿﺮﺭﺍﯾﮕﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍﯾﮕﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺒﺮﻫﺎی ﺗﺎﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﺯﯾﺮﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺭﻭی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻗﯿﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻗﯿﻤﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻏﯿﺮﺭﺍﯾﮕﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﯾﮕﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﮕﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .
PAGE 272
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﺯی ﯾﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﯾﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ )ﯾﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯی ﯾﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪) .‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯی‪/‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ( ﻧﯿﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 273
‫™‪Google Talk‬‬ ‫‪ Google TalkTM‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻓﻮﺭی ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪Google‬‬ ‫‪ TalkTM‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ‬ ‫– ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ‬ ‫– ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﭼﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺖ ﯾﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺖ)ﻫﺎﯾﯽ( ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﺯ ﭼﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ‪ .
PAGE 274
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﮔﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ‪ Google Talk‬ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﭘﯿﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﯾﻞ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﯿﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ‪Google‬‬ ‫‪Talk‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﯾﮏ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﭼﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﻼﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 275
‫‪ 2‬ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺯﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫‪ Google Talk‬ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ‪ Google Talk‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﯿﺴﺖ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺯﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 276
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪120‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪/‬ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺯﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‪) ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ( ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻌﺪی ﯾﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻧﮓ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 277
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﯾﮏ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺭﻭی ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﯾﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .
PAGE 278
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻧﻤﺎی ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺗﻘﻮﯾﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﻫﻔﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺎﻩ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Polaris Office‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ‪ Polaris Office‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻭ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ‪micro SD‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Polaris Office‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 279
‫‪ 7‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﺳﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫< ﻓﺎﯾﻞ < ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ) ﯾﺎ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺳﻨﺪ( ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ Polaris Office‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪micro SD‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻦ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﯾﺮﮐﺘﻮﺭی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﺒﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮی ﺁﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ‪.
PAGE 280
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺳﻨﺪ )‪Word،‬‬ ‫‪ ،Excel‬ﯾﺎ ‪ (PowerPoint file‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﺮﯾﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﮔﯿﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‪ ..‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ‪Polaris Office‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Polaris Office‬ﯾﮏ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﮏ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 281
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻠﯿﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﯾﺎ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﯾﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺴﯿﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫<‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 282
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﯿﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﭗ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ Gmail‬ﻭ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﯾﻤﯿﻞ‪Gmail ،‬‬ ‫ﯾﺎ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 283
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 284
‫ﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺩﻧﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﺭﻧﮕﺎﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﺯﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‪ ،‬ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫> ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ <‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺮ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪128‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ‪ -‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ‪.
PAGE 285
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻥ – ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻌﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻓﯿﺪ ‪ – RSS‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) RSS‬ﺳﻨﺪﯾﮑﺎی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ( ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻭﯾﺲ ﺧﺒﺮی ﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻫﺎی ﻭﺑﻼگ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﯾﺎ ﭘﺎﺩﮐﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 286
‫ﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ – ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺩﯾﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ – ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺑﯿﺎﺑﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻦ – ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﭗ ﺑﻮﺭﺩ ﮐﭙﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺟﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻕ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ‬ ‫• ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ – ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ – ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 287
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ‪ URL‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﯿﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﻞ ﯾﺎﺏ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻟﯿﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ‪ URL‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 288
‫‪On-Screen Phone‬‬ ‫‪LG On-Screen Phone 2.0‬‬ ‫‪ On-Screen Phone‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪،USB‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﯾﺎ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﯾﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ‪On-Screen Phone‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ On-Screen Phone‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪ )ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‪.
PAGE 289
‫ﯾﮏ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﯾﺎ ﯾﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ(‪ :(:‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫)ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ )ﻣﺜﻼ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﻭ ‪ Polaris Office‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ(‪ :(:‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫)ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 290
‫‪On-Screen Phone‬‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪ On-Screen Phone 2.0‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ ،USB‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﯾﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ OSP‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ On-Screen Phone‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫< ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ < ‪ On-Screen Phone‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ On-Screen Phone‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺗﺮ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 291
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ On-Screen Phone‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ On-Screen Phone‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﯾﺎ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ" <‬ ‫"‪ On-Screen Phone‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ"‬ ‫ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ ﻭ "‪Phone‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪..‬‬ ‫‪ ""On-Screen‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬ ‫"ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪On-Screen Phone‬‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ" ﺭﺍ‬ ‫"ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺍی ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 292
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﯿﻤﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪ VPN‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫< ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ < ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﯿﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﯿﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﻭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮﺍﭘﯿﻤﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﯾﮏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺁﺑﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪.
PAGE 293
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ‪ – Wi-Fi Direct‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi Direct‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Wi-Fi Direct‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ – ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﯽ ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ :‬ﯾﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﯾﺖ‪ :‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﯾﺖ‬‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﯾﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 294
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ – ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪138‬‬ ‫ﻟﺮﺯﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ‪ -‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﮐﻨﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ‪.
PAGE 295
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ -‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍﯾﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ – ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﻗﺘﯽ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺻﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﯽ ﻟﺮﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ – ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ – ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک – ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ – ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 296
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ‪ -‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﯿﻦ ﺗﺎﯾﭗ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ‪ -‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺁﻥ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﺞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ – ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 297
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻫﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ – GPS‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻫﻮﺍﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ‪ GPS‬ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﯿﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ – ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﺮﺳﯿﻢ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺯﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺪ ﭘﯿﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﻫﯿﭻ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 298
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ‪ -‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎک‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﮐﺪ ﭘﯿﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﮐﺪ ﭘﯿﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻤﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ < ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺖ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ < ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮ‪ ،‬ﮐﺪ ﭘﯿﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 299
‫ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ ﯾﺎ ﮐﺪ ﭘﯿﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﯿﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﯿﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ +‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪ :‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﻢ‪.
PAGE 300
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫‪ Play‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ – ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﯾﺮﯾﺖ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ – ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ – ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی – ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭼﻪ ﭼﯿﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻧﯿﺮﻭی‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ – ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 301
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﻼﮔﯿﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻨﺪﻩ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﯿﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ Android‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﯿﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﭘﻼﮔﯿﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 302
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 303
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ‪ ،‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺑﺎﺯﺩﯾﺪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪/http://www.lg.
PAGE 304
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ < ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ < ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ < ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪ LG‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﻖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺻﻼﺣﺪﯾﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 305
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﲡﺎﺭی‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﯿﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪GPL، LGPL،‬‬ ‫‪ MPL‬ﻭ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻣﺠﻮﺯﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺩﯾﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬ ‫‪/http://opensource.lge.com‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‪ ،‬ﺳﻠﺐ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﯿﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﯿﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ‪ DivX‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ‪ DivX‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ ‪ divx.com‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 306
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﲡﺎﺭی‬ ‫®‬ ‫‪ ®DivX Certified‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ‪ DivX‬ﺑﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،720P‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﮑﯿﮏ ‪،720P‬‬ ‫‪ ®DivX®، DivX Certified‬ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ‪ Rovi Corporation‬ﻭ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Dolby Mobile‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻟﯿﺴﺎﻧﺲ ‪Dolby Laboratories.‬‬ ‫‪ Dolby‬ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﻭ ‪ D‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ‪Dolby‬‬ ‫‪ Laboratories‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 307
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪(.(.‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭی ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ‪ LG-P936‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺗﯽ‬ ‫‪ LG-P936‬ﻭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﯾﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮی‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ‪LG-P936‬‬ ‫ﮐﺴﺐ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺻﻞ ‪ LG‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﯾﺖ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ‬‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 308
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﯿﻂ‬ Declaration of Conformity Suppliers Details Name LG Electronics Inc Address LG Twin Tower 20,Yeouido-dong, Yeongdeungpo-gu Seoul, Korea 150-721 Product Details Product Name GSM 850 / E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Quad Band , WCDMA and LTE Terminal Equipment ‫ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬+45 (‫ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ )ﺩﺷﺎﺭژ‬+55 :‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬ (‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ )ﺷﺎﺭژ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ‬ ‫ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‬-10 :‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ‬ Model Name LG-P936 Trade Name LG Applicable Standards Details R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC EN 301 489-01
PAGE 309
‫ﻋﯿﺐ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻓﻊ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﺳﯿﻢ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﯿﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪ /‬ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 310
‫ﻋﯿﺐ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮐﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﯿﺘﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﺪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﺪﻫﺎ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﯿﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﮐﺪی ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﺪ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮑﺪﯾﮕﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 311
‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﯾﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﯾﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ PIN 2‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻫﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺳﯿﺪﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺩﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻫﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 312
‫ﻋﯿﺐ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫‪156‬‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎی ﺷﺎﺭژ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﯿﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻡ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﯿﺰ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﯾﺰ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ‪ LG‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 313
‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ‪/‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ SMS‬ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﯽ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ‪FAT16،‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ SD‬ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ FAT32‬ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 314
‫ﻋﯿﺐ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻢ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﯿﻒ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮑﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﭘﻮﺷﯿﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺗﻤﯿﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﯾﺖ‬ ‫‪158‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﯾﺎ ﺑﯿﺼﺪﺍ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 315
‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺭﻭﮐﺶ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺩﺭﺏ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.
PAGE 316
PAGE 317
ENGLISH LG-P936 User Guide This guide helps you get started using your phone. If you need more information, please visit www.lg.com. • Some of the contents of this manual may not apply to your phone. This depends on your phone’s software and your service provider. • This handset is not recommended for the visually impaired because of its touch screen keyboard. • Copyright ©2012 LG Electronics, Inc. All rights reserved. LG and the LG logo are registered trademarks of LG Group and its related entities.
PAGE 318
Table of Contents Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient use .........8 Getting to know your phone ....................18 Your Phone...............................................28 Getting Started ........................................31 Installing the SIM card and battery ...........31 Charging your phone ...............................33 Inserting a micro SD card ........................35 Removing the micro SD card ...................36 Formatting the microSD card ...................
PAGE 319
Entering accented letters .........................56 Google Account Set-up ............................57 Creating your Google account ..................57 Signing into your Google account .............58 Connecting to Networks and Devices ......60 Wi-Fi ......................................................60 Bluetooth................................................62 Data Tethering ........................................64 Mobile Hotspots ......................................65 Wi-Fi Direct ...........
PAGE 320
Table of Contents Messaging/Email .....................................78 Messaging .............................................78 Email .....................................................80 Social Networking ...................................86 Adding an account to your phone .............86 Adding a social networking widget on the home screen ..........................................87 Viewing and updating your status ............87 Syncing accounts on your phone..............
PAGE 321
Multimedia.............................................103 Gallery .................................................103 Sending a video ....................................104 Using an image.....................................105 Viewing a slideshow ..............................105 View photo details .................................105 Transferring ﬁles using USB mass storage devices ....................................106 Music...................................................
PAGE 322
Table of Contents Gmail™ ...............................................119 Google Talk™.......................................120 Adding bookmarks ................................133 Changing the Browser settings ..............134 Utilities...................................................123 Setting the alarm ..................................123 Using the calculator ..............................123 Adding an event to your calendar ...........123 Polaris Ofﬁce ........................................
PAGE 323
Privacy .................................................147 SD card & phone storage ......................147 Language & keyboard ...........................148 Voice input & output ..............................148 Accessibility .........................................148 Connectivity settings .............................148 Date & time ..........................................149 About phone .........................................149 Copyrights and trademarks ...................152 DivX Mobile ....
PAGE 324
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient use Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be dangerous or illegal. Exposure to radio frequency energy Radio wave exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) information. This mobile phone model LG-P936 has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirements for exposure to radio waves.
PAGE 325
• The highest SAR value for this model phone tested by DASY4 for use at the ear is 0.567 W/kg (10 g) and when worn on the body is 0.872 W/kg (10 g). • This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 1.5 cm away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for bodyworn operation, it should not contain metal and should position the product at least 1.5 cm away from your body.
PAGE 326
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient use • Do not disassemble this unit. Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required. • Repairs under warranty, at LG’s discretion, may include replacement parts or boards that are either new or reconditioned, provided they have functionality equal to that of the parts being replaced. • Keep away from electrical appliances such as TVs, radios, and personal computers. • The unit should be kept away from heat sources such as radiators or cookers.
PAGE 327
• Use a dry cloth to clean the exterior of the unit (do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner or alcohol). • Do not charge the phone when it is on soft furnishings. • The phone should be charged in a well ventilated area. • Do not subject this unit to excessive smoke or dust. • Do not keep the phone next to credit cards or transport tickets; it can affect the information on the magnetic strips. • Do not tap the screen with a sharp object as it may damage the phone.
PAGE 328
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient use in the absence of adequate ventilation may result in discomfort or minor burns. Therefore, use care when handling your phone during or immediately after operation. Efficient phone operation Electronics devices All mobile phones may get interference, which could affect performance. • Do not use your mobile phone near medical equipment without requesting permission. Avoid placing the phone over pacemakers, for example, in your breast pocket.
PAGE 329
and safety equipment. • When your vehicle is equipped with an air bag, do not obstruct with installed or portable wireless equipment. It can cause the air bag to fail or cause serious injury due to improper performance. • If you are listening to music whilst out and about, please ensure that the volume is at a reasonable level so that you are aware of your surroundings. This is particularly imperative when near roads.
PAGE 330
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient use Glass Parts Some parts of your mobile device are made of glass. This glass could break if your mobile device is dropped on a hard surface or receives a substantial impact. If the glass breaks, do not touch or attempt to remove. Stop using your mobile device until the glass is replaced by an authorised service provider. Blasting area Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules.
PAGE 331
any aircraft. • Do not use it on the ground without permission from the crew. Children Keep the phone in a safe place out of the reach of small children. It contains small parts which may cause a choking hazard if detached. Emergency calls Emergency calls may not be available under all mobile networks. Therefore, you should never depend solely on the phone for emergency calls. Check with your local service provider.
PAGE 332
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient use • Replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance. The battery pack may be recharged hundreds of times until it needs replacing. • Recharge the battery if it has not been used for a long time to maximise usability. • Do not expose the battery charger to direct sunlight or use it in high humidity, such as in the bathroom. • Do not leave the battery in hot or cold places as this may deteriorate the battery performance.
PAGE 333
configuration, product settings, usage patterns, battery and environmental conditions.
PAGE 334
Getting to know your phone Before you start using the phone, please read this! Please check to see if any problems you have encountered with your phone are described in this section before taking the phone in for service or calling a service representative. 1. Phone Memory In order to make more memory available, you will have to manage your applications and delete some data, such as applications or messages.
PAGE 335
can also monitor how applications and system resources consume battery power. To extend the life of your battery - Turn off radio communications that you aren't using, such as Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or GPS. - Lower screen brightness and set a shorter screen timeout. - Turn off automatic syncing for Gmail™, Calendar, Contacts, and other applications. - Some applications you have downloaded may cause your battery power to be reduced. - While using downloaded applications, check the battery charged level.
PAGE 336
Getting to know your phone to a power source, or if connected to a power source, how long you were last running on battery power. The screen also lists applications or services using battery power from greatest amount to least. 3. Installing an Open Source Operating System Installing an open source operating system on your phone and not using the operating system provided by the manufacturer can cause your phone to malfunction.
PAGE 337
4. Using the Unlock Pattern, PIN, or Password Set an unlock Pattern, PIN, or Password to secure your phone. To set the screen lock, follow the process below. Tap the Menu Key , tap Settings > Location & security > Set up screen lock and select among Pattern, PIN or Password. Warning Take precautions when using an Unlock Pattern, PIN, or Password. It is very important that you remember the screen unlock information you set. You are allowed 5 attempts to enter your screen unlock information.
PAGE 338
Getting to know your phone times, tap Forgot Pattern? You will be required to sign in with your Google account and prompted to create a new unlock pattern. If you haven’t created a Google account on the phone or you forgot your PIN or Password, you need to perform a hard reset. 5. Using Hard Reset (Factory Reset) If your phone needs to be restored to its original condition, use a Hard Reset to initialize your phone. 1 Turn the power off.
PAGE 339
6. Using a micro SD Card Pictures, Music and Video files, can be saved to external memory. Before saving these files to external memory, you need to insert a micro SD card. If you have not inserted a micro SD card, you will not be able to save these items on external memory. Warning Do not remove the micro SD card without unmounting it first. Otherwise, it may damage the micro SD card as well as your phone, and the data stored on the micro SD card may be corrupted.
PAGE 340
Getting to know your phone 7. Connecting your phone to a computer via USB 1 Use the USB cable that was provided with your phone to connect the phone to a USB port on your computer. You'll receive a notification that the USB is connected and can see USB connection mode popup. 2 Tap Mass storage and OK to confirm that you want to transfer files between your phone’s micro SD card and the computer. When the phone is connected as USB storage, you receive a notification.
PAGE 341
8. Synchronising your phone to a Computer (LG PC Suite) LG PC Suite IV is a program that helps you connect your mobile phone to a PC using a USB data communication cable. Once connected, you can use the functions of your mobile phone on your PC.
PAGE 342
Getting to know your phone “LG PC Suite” PC software. run LG PC Suite IV. NOTE: Do not remove or delete other program Or you can download the program from the preinstalled microSD card. 1 Connect the USB data cable to your PC. Make sure that Mass storage mode is enabled on your phone. 2 Copy the LGPCSuiteIV folder from mass storage to your PC. 3 Run the LGInstaller.exe file on your PC and follow the instructions.
PAGE 343
Lock Key. 10. Hold the phone straight up Please hold the mobile phone straight up as a regular phone. While making/receiving calls or sending/ receiving data, try to avoid holding the lower part of the phone where the antenna is located. It may affect call quality. 11. When the screen freezes seconds to turn it off. Then, press and hold the Power/Lock Key again for 3 seconds to reboot the phone. 12.
PAGE 344
Your Phone To turn on the phone, press and hold the Power/Lock Key for 3 seconds. To turn off the phone, press the Power/Lock Key for 3 seconds and tap Power off and OK to confirm. Earpiece Front-Facing Camera Lens - Used to take a self-shot. Quick Keys - Phone Key - Messaging Key - Browser Key - Applications Key Menu/Search Key - Displays available options for the current screen. - Touch and hold to activate the search function. Home Key - Returns to the Home screen from any screen.
PAGE 345
Warning TIPS Placing a heavy object on the phone or sitting on it can damage its LCD and touch screen functionalities. Do not cover the LCD’s proximity sensor with a protective film. This can cause the sensor to malfunction. - Tap the Menu Key whenever you open an application to check what options are available. - If your phone has errors when you use it or you cannot turn it on, remove the battery, install it again and turn it on after 5 seconds.
PAGE 346
Your Phone Power/Lock Key 3.5mm Headset Jack Charger/Accessory Port Flash Camera Lens Back Cover Fingertip cutout Microphone Volume Keys - Allows you to adjust the ringer and media volumes, or to adjust the in-call volume during a call. - Press and hold the volume down key to switch to the silent mode.
PAGE 347
Getting Started Installing the SIM card and battery Before you can start exploring your new phone, you’ll need to set it up. To insert the SIM card and battery: 1 Hold the phone on your hand firmly. With the other hand, lift the back cover using the fingertip cutout located on the bottom of the cover and remove it.
PAGE 348
Getting Started 2 Slide the SIM card into the SIM card slot. Make sure the gold contact area on the card is facing downwards. 32 3 Insert the battery into place by aligning the gold contacts on the phone and the battery.
PAGE 349
4 Replace the back cover of the phone (as demonstrated below). Apply a steady downward pressure until the battery cover clicks into place. Charging your phone 1 Connect the cabless wall adapter and USB cable. 2 Plug the USB cable (as shown below) into the phone's charger/accessory port. Make sure the USB symbol is facing upwards.
PAGE 350
Getting Started 34 NOTE NOTE The battery must be fully charged initially to improve battery lifetime. Your phone has an internal antenna. Be careful not to scratch or damage this rear area, as that will cause loss of performance. If the phone is turned off as the battery is fully discharged, the battery is called a weak battery. In this case when the phone connect to the charger(TA or USB) cable, the keypad LED at the bottom of the phone will be blinking.
PAGE 351
Inserting a micro SD card Insert a micro SD™ card to use the camera and other multimedia features. Multimedia contents can be saved in the micro SD card. LG-P936 has a micro SD card pre-installed. 1 Turn the phone off before inserting or removing the micro SD card. Remove the back cover. NOTE This device supports up to a 32GB micro SD card.
PAGE 352
Getting Started 2 Then insert the micro SD card into the slot. Make sure the gold contact area is facing downwards. Removing the micro SD card To safely remove the micro SD card from your phone, first you need to unmount it.
PAGE 353
NOTE On Android OS 2.3 and above, you can download applications from Play Store and store them on a micro SD card as well as on the phone. Due to this feature, if you skip the unmount procedure, it can cause an error because information between the micro SD card and the phone is not accorded properly. In the worst case, the micro SD card can be corrupted or damaged. 1 From the Home screen, tap the Menu Key and tap Settings > SD card & phone storage > Unmount SD card.
PAGE 354
Getting Started NOTE NOTE All files on the card are deleted when you format the micro SD card. If there is content on your micro SD card, the folder structure may be different after formatting since all the files will have been deleted. 1 From the Home screen, tap the Menu Key and tap Settings > SD card & phone storage > Unmount SD card. 2 Tap Erase SD card and Erase SD card button. 3 If you set an unlock pattern, enter it and tap Erase everything. The card will then be formatted and ready to use.
PAGE 355
and starting them as needed, to ensure that idle applications don’t consume resources unnecessarily. Switching between applications - Touch and hold the Home Key . A list of recently used applications will be displayed. Then tap the application you want to access. To stop/exit an application 1 From the Home screen, tap the Menu Key and tap Settings > Applications > Manage applications. 2 Tap the desired application and tap Force stop to exit.
PAGE 356
Getting Started NOTE When your device is connected to an MHL-enabled HDTV, the cable will simultaneously charge the device and output media. If connected to an HDTV without MHL, the cable will not charge the connected device unless an MHL-HDMI adapter is used.
PAGE 357
Your Home screen Touch screen tips With the touch of your finger, you can access available applications, make menu selections, and access data saved to your phone. The following terms are used for describing the different available actions using the touchscreen: Tap - A single finger tap selects items, links, shortcuts and letters on the on-screen keyboard. Touch and hold - Touch and hold an item on the screen by touching it and not lifting your finger until an action occurs.
PAGE 358
Your Home screen vice versa). Double-tap - Double-tap to zoom on a Web page or a map. For example, quickly double-tap a section of a Web page to adjust that section to fit the width of the screen. You can also double-tap to zoom in and out when taking a picture (using the Camera), and when using Maps. Pinch-to-Zoom - Use your index finger and thumb in a pinch or spread motion to zoom in or out when using the browser, Maps, or browsing pictures.
PAGE 359
Proximity sensors When receiving and making calls, this sensor automatically turns the backlight off and locks the touch keypad by sensing when the phone is near your ear. This extends battery life and prevents the touch keypad from activating unintentionally during calls. Lock your phone the Home screen or other screen you are viewing, is automatically replaced with the lock screen after 30 seconds of inactivity to conserve the battery and prevent pocket dialing.
PAGE 360
Your Home screen NOTE • The automatic screen timeout can be configured manually in Settings. • If there are any programs running when you lock the phone, they may still be running in lock mode. It is recommended that you exit all programs before entering the lock mode to avoid unnecessary charges (e.g., phone call, web access and data communications). Setting an unlock pattern: You can draw your own unlock pattern by connecting four or more dots.
PAGE 361
Home Customizing your Home screen Simply swipe your finger to the left or right to view the different panels. You can also customize each panel with shortcuts, and folders. You can also customize each panel with widgets, which are shortcuts to your Favourite applications. You can customize your Home screen by adding quick access elements, such as shortcuts, widgets, folders to it, or changing the wallpaper.
PAGE 362
Your Home screen and shortcuts. • Wallpaper: Change the Home screen wallpaper. To add Widgets, Shortcuts, and Folders on the Home screen: 1 Select a location (Home screen panels) to add an item by swiping the Home screen from left to right or vice versa. 2 Tap the Menu Key > Add. Or, touch and hold an empty part of the Home screen. 3 Tap the type of item you want to add on the screen: Widgets, Shortcuts, Folders, or 46 Wallpaper. 4 Tap an available widget, shortcut, or folder.
PAGE 363
NOTE If there is no available space on a particular Home screen panel, Add will not be available; you must delete or remove an item before you can add another item. In this case, you have the option of switching to another Home screen panel. To delete an application icon from the Home screen, touch and hold the shortcut icon you want to delete and drag to at the bottom of the screen. You cannot delete the preloaded applications. (Only their icons can be deleted from the screen).
PAGE 364
Your Home screen recent notifications. The Notifications panel runs across the top of your screen. Vibrate Mode Wi-Fi Bluetooth GPS Data Mode Touch and hold the Status Bar and slide it down with your finger. Or, from the Home screen, tap the Menu Key > Notifications. From here, you can check and quickly turn on and off Silent (Vibrate) mode, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, GPS, and Data Mode.
PAGE 365
Viewing the Status bar The Status bar uses different icons to display phone information, such as signal strength, new messages, battery life, and active Bluetooth and data connections. Below is a table explaining the meaning of icons you are likely to see in the Status bar.
PAGE 366
Your Home screen Icon Description Icon Description Missed call Battery is charging Bluetooth is on Phone is connected to PC via USB cable Connected to a Bluetooth device Alarm is set Downloading data New voicemail available Uploading data Ringer is silenced GPS is on Vibrate mode is on Receiving location data from GPS Battery fully charged On-Screen Phone connected 3 more notifications not displayed 50
PAGE 367
Icon Description Icon Description Data is synchronizing USB tethering is active. Download finished Portable Wi-Fi hotspot is active New email available New Gmail available USB tethering & Portable Wi-Fi hotspot are active. New Google Talk message available Data in and out New text/multimedia message available Song is playing Upcoming event On-screen Keyboard You can enter text using the on-screen keyboard.
PAGE 368
Your Home screen enter text. To manually display the keyboard, simply tap a text field where you want to enter text. LG keyboard - QWERTY - Letters Entry 52 Shift Key - Tap once to capitalize the next letter you type. Double-tap for all caps. Number and Symbols/ Settings Key - Tap to change input to number and symbol entry. Touch and hold to set various LG keyboard settings. Delete Key - Tap to delete characters to the left of the cursor. Hide Keyboard Key - Tap to hide the keyboard.
PAGE 369
LG keyboard - QWERTY - Numbers and Symbols Entry The keyboard will change to alternate characters. Letters/ Settings Key - Tap to change input to letters entry. Touch and hold to set various LG keyboard settings. Space Key - Tap to enter space. Delete Key - Tap to delete characters to the left of the cursor. Hide Keyboard Key - Tap to hide the keyboard. Next Key - Tap to move the cursor to the next field. Alt Key - Tap to enter additional symbols.
PAGE 370
Your Home screen LG keyboard – Phone keypad To switch to the phone keypad on LG keyboard, touch and hold . Tap LG keyboard settings > Keyboard layout, then tap Phone keypad. The Phone keypad allows you to enter letters by tapping the key labeled with the desired letters, similar to how you would on a traditional 12 key phone. You may have to tap a key up to four times to type the desired letter or number. Shift Key - Tap once to capitalize the next letter you type. Double-tap for all caps.
PAGE 371
Delete Key - Tap to delete characters to the left of the cursor. Number and Symbols/ Settings Key - Tap to change input to number and symbol entry. Touch and hold to set various LG keyboard settings. Enter Key - Tap to move the cursor to the next line. Hide Keypad Key - Tap to hide the keypad. T9 Key - Tap to turn on the T9 entry mode. Entering text Shift Key - Tap once to capitalize the next letter you type. Double-tap for all caps.
PAGE 372
Your Home screen from the screen. Delete Key- Deletes any text you have entered. . To enter a space, tap 123 Mode This mode allows you to enter numbers in a text message (a telephone number, for example) more quickly. Tap the keys corresponding to the required digits before manually switching back to the appropriate text key. entry mode by tapping the 56 Entering accented letters When you select French as the text entry language, you can enter special French characters (e.g., “á”).
PAGE 373
Google Account Set-up The first time you open a Google application on your phone, you will be required to sign in with your existing Google account. If you do not have a Google account, you will be prompted to create one. Creating your Google account 1 From the Home screen, tap the Applications Key . 2 Tap Gmail > Next > Create to start the Gmail™ setup wizard. 3 Tap a text field to open the keyboard and enter your name and username for your Google account.
PAGE 374
Google Account Set-up Signing into your Google account 1 Enter your email address and password, then tap Sign in. 2 After signing in, you can use Gmail™ and take advantages of Google services on your phone. 3 Once you have set up your Google account, your phone will be automatically synchronized with your Google account on the web. (Depending on your synchronization settings.
PAGE 375
and other information from these applications and services on the web are synchronized with your phone. If you don’t sign into a Google Account during setup, you will be prompted to sign in or to create a Google Account the first time you start an application that requires one, such as Gmail or Play Store™. • If you have an enterprise account through your company or other organization, your IT department may have special instructions on how to sign into that account.
PAGE 376
Connecting to Networks and Devices Wi-Fi Wireless & networks > Wi-Fi To use Wi-Fi on your phone, you need access to a wireless access point, or "hotspot." Some access points are open and you can simply connect to them. Others are hidden or implement other security features, so you must configure your phone in order to connect to them. To connect to a Wi-Fi Network Turn on Wi-Fi From the Home Screen, open the Notifications panel and tap to turn Wi-Fi on. OR Tap the Menu Key and tap Settings > 60 .
PAGE 377
- If the network is open, you are prompted to confirm that you want to connect to that network by tapping Connect. - If the network is secured, you are prompted to enter a password or other credentials. (Ask your network administrator for details). 4 The Status Bar at the top of your screen will display an icon that indicates your Wi-Fi status. NOTE This device supports WEP, WPA/WPA2PSK, WPA PSK, WPA2 Only PSK and 802.1x EAP. (Some EAP methods are not supported.
PAGE 378
Connecting to Networks and Devices Bluetooth Using Bluetooth 1 From the Wireless & networks screen, tap Bluetooth to turn on the Bluetooth setting. 2 Tap Bluetooth settings > Scan for devices. 3 Tap the name of the device you wish to pair with, and then tap Pair to pair and connect. TIP Please consult documentation included with Bluetooth device for information on pairing mode and passcode (typically 0 0 0 0 – four zeroes).
PAGE 379
> Bluetooth. Check if Bluetooth is turned on and tap Scan for devices. Then tap the device you want to send data to from the list. * Sending multi-selected contacts: Open the Contacts application. To select more than one contact, tap the Menu Key and tap Share . Tap the contacts you want to send or tap Select all. Then tap Share > Bluetooth. Check if Bluetooth is turned on and tap Scan for devices. Then tap the device you want to send data to from the list.
PAGE 380
Connecting to Networks and Devices TIP The supported Bluetooth version is Bluetooth 3.0 and certified by Bluetooth SIG. It is compatible with other Bluetooth SIG certified devices. - If you want to search for this phone from other devices, from the Home and screen, tap the Menu Key tap Settings > Wireless & networks > Bluetooth settings. Make sure Bluetooth is turned on. Tap Discoverable to place a checkmark and make the phone visible to other Bluetooth devices for 120 seconds.
PAGE 381
NOTE - Data Tethering requires an appropriate DataPro data plan. Devices connected by tethering use data from your DataPro plan. Plans are not unlimited and significant charges may be incurred if the included data allowance is exceeded. Performance may vary depending on the number of devices connected and other factors. - You cannot access your phone's micro SD card on your computer when using USB tethering.
PAGE 382
Connecting to Networks and Devices 66 NOTE Wi-Fi Direct Mobile Hotspots requires an appropriate DataPro data plan. Devices connected to your Mobile Hotspot use data from your DataPro plan. Plans are not unlimited and significant charges may be incurred if the included data allowance is exceeded. Performance may vary depending on the number of devices connected and other factors. If you do not use a password, others will be able to use your Mobile Hotspot connection.
PAGE 383
Wi-Fi Share You can share your music, picture and video content between users connected via the same Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Directed or potable hotspot network. Check your network settings in advance and make sure the users are connected to the same network. Send data 1 Applications Key > Wi-Fi Share 2 Add files you want to share. 3 On the top of the screen, you can see all devices connected with your phone. Select devices you want to share with and then touch the .
PAGE 384
Connecting to Networks and Devices this feature. To turn SmartShare on and allow sharing contents 1 Tap the Applications Key > SmartShare. 2 Tap the Menu Key > Settings. 3 Tap Discoverable checkbox to turn on. - Tap Always accept request to automatically accept sharing requests from other devices. - Tap Receive files to allow automatically allow upload files to my phone from other devices. 68 4 Under the Sharing contents section, tap each type of content you would like to share.
PAGE 385
NOTE Make sure that the DLNA functionality of your devices is properly configured (e.g. TV and PC) 1 Tap the Applications Key > SmartShare. 2 Tap the top right button to or select the device from renderer lists. 3 Tap the top left button and select the device of the remote content library. 4 You can browse the content library. 5 Tap a content thumbnail or tap the Menu Key and tap Play button. To share contents from your phone to your renderer device(e.g.
PAGE 386
Connecting to Networks and Devices the files. NOTE Follow the similar steps to use the Music player, Camera and Video player to share contents. NOTICE Check that your device is connected with your home network using Wi-Fi connection to use this application. Some DLNA enabled devices (e.g. TV) support only the DMP feature of DLNA and will not appear in the renderer device list. Your device might not be able to play some contents.
PAGE 387
To upload contents from my phone to remote content library 5 Select a device of remote content library to be uploaded. NOTE NOTICE Make sure that SD card is correctly mounted and the Receive files in settings menu is checked. Some DLNA enabled devices do not support DMS upload functionality and will not be uploaded. A few types of contents are not supported. 1 Tap the Applications Key > SmartShare. 2 Tap the top left button and select My phone. 3 You can browse the content library.
PAGE 388
Calls Making a call Calling your contacts 1 Tap to open the keypad. 2 Enter the number on the keypad. To delete a digit, tap the Clear icon . 3 Tap the Call icon to make a call. 4 To end a call, tap the End icon . 1 Tap to open your contacts. 2 Scroll through the contact list or tap the Search box and enter the first letter(s) of the contact you want to call. 3 In the list that is displayed, tap the contact you want to call. 4 In the Contact Info screen, tap the phone number you wish to call.
PAGE 389
to the right. Drag the Decline icon to the left to reject an incoming call. Drag the Excuse Msg bar upwards if you want to send a message to the caller. If the caller is unknown, this Excuse Msg bar is not available. When the screen is unlocked When your phone rings, tap the Answer icon . Tap Decline icon to reject an incoming call. Tap the Excuse Msg bar upwards if you want to send a message to the caller. If the caller is unknown, the Excuse Msg bar is not available.
PAGE 390
Calls screen. Your initial call will be locked and put on hold. 5 Tap the Contact on the screen to toggle between calls or tap to merge the calls. 6 To end active calls, tap End. If there is no active call, it will end the call on Hold. NOTE You will be charged for each call you make. Viewing your call logs From the Home screen, tap the Call icon and the Call log tab. View a complete list of all dialed, received, and 74 missed voice calls.
PAGE 391
1 From the Home screen, tap the Menu Key and tap Settings. 2 Tap Call settings.
PAGE 392
Contacts You can add contacts on your phone and synchronize them with the contacts in your Google Account or other accounts that support syncing contacts. Searching for a contact 1 From the Home screen, tap the Applications Key and then tap to open your contacts. 2 Tap the Search field and enter the contact name using the keypad. 76 Adding a new contact 1 Tap and enter the new contact’s number. Tap the Menu Key , tap Add to contacts and then Create new contact.
PAGE 393
Favourite Contacts You can classify frequently called contacts as favourites. To add a contact to your favourites 1 From the Home screen, tap the Applications Key and then tap to open your contacts. 2 Tap a contact to view its details. 3 Tap the star to the right of the contact’s name. The star turns gold and the contact is added to your favourites. and then tap to open your Key contacts. 2 Tap the Groups tab and tap favourites. 3 Tap a contact to view its details.
PAGE 394
Messaging/Email Messaging Your phone combines SMS and MMS into one intuitive, easy-to-use menu. Threaded box Messages (SMS and MMS) exchanged with another party can be displayed in chronological order so that you can conveniently see an overview of your conversation. Sending a message 1 Tap the icon on the Home screen, then tap New message to create a new message. 2 Enter a contact name or phone number 78 in the To field. As you enter the contact name, matching contacts appear.
PAGE 395
5 Tap Send to send your message. 6 The message screen opens, with your message after recipient name/number. Responses appear on the screen. As you view and send additional messages, a message thread is created. Warning The 160-character limit may vary from country to country depending on how the SMS is coded and the language used in the message. Warning If an image, video, or audio file is added to an SMS message, it will be automatically converted into an MMS message and you will be charged accordingly.
PAGE 396
Messaging/Email Changing your message settings To open the Email application Your phone's message settings are predefined, so you can send messages immediately. You can change the settings based on your preferences.  From the Home screen, tap Messaging > Menu Key > Settings.  From the Home screen, tap the Applications Email You can use the Email application to read Email from providers other than Gmail.
PAGE 397
Server address – Enter the server address Use SSL – Choose whether or not to use SSL for Microsoft Exchange. Other (POP3, IMAP) Email Account Email address – Enter the account email address. Password – Enter the account password. Setup complete page will appear and you will need to enter “name”. The account will now appear in the list of accounts in your Email folder. POP3 / IMAP4 – Select protocol type, either POP3 or IMAP4. Incoming server – Enter the incoming email server address.
PAGE 398
Messaging/Email The account will now appear in the list of accounts in your Email folder. The Accounts Screen The Accounts screen lists your Combined Inbox and each of your email accounts.  Tap the Applications Key > Email. The Account list appears. TIP To make a shortcut to the Inbox of an account: In the accounts list, touch and hold an email account. Then, tap Add to homescreen. 82 You can tap an account to view its Inbox. The default account from which you send email is indicated with a checkmark.
PAGE 399
screen. When a new email arrives in the inbox, there will be sound and vibration notification. Tap the email notification to end it. Composing and Sending Email 1 In the Email application, tap the Compose. 2 Enter an address for the message’s intended recipient. As you enter text, matching addresses will be offered from your contacts. 3 Tap the Cc/Bcc field to copy or blind copy to other contacts/email addresses. 4 Enter the text of the message.
PAGE 400
Messaging/Email you’re connected to a network. If it contains any pending messages, the Outbox will be displayed on the Accounts screen. NOTE The messages sent using an Exchange account will not be stored on the phone; they will be stored on the Exchange server itself. If you want to see your sent messages in the Sent folder (or with the Sent label), you may need to open the Sent folder/label and select Refresh from the options menu.
PAGE 401
account. To change account settings 1 Open the Accounts screen. 2 Tap the Menu Key > Settings. To delete an email account 1 Open the Accounts screen. 2 Touch and hold the account you want to delete. 3 Tap Remove account in the menu that opens and tap Remove in the dialogue box to confirm.
PAGE 402
Social Networking With your phone, you can enjoy social networking and manage your micro-blog in on-line communities. You can update your current status, upload photos, and view your friends’ status updates in real-time. You can add your Facebook, Twitter, and MySpace accounts to your phone. If you don’t have an account, you can visit their sites to set one up. 86 NOTE Additional costs may be incurred when connecting and using online services. Check your data charges with your network provider.
PAGE 403
4 Enter your email address and password that you set up for your social networking account, then tap Log in. Adding a social networking widget on the home screen If you add a social networking widget on your Home screen, the widget will show your status when your phone receives updates from the network. You can also access the social community directly by tapping the widget. 1 Touch and hold an empty spot on the Home screen.
PAGE 404
Social Networking 1 You can select each social application you'd like to view. Tap the . 2 Tap "What are you doing?" field to update your status with comments or upload pictures. - Check all the social applications you'd like to update. It'll will simultaneously update all. 3 After entering comments with attachment (if any), tap Post. TIP You can use information about friends only in your social network(s) or sync all data to Contacts.
PAGE 405
been enabled. Removing accounts on your phone 1 From the Home screen, tap the Menu Key > Settings > Accounts & sync. 2 Tap the account(s) you want to delete, then tap Remove account (twice).
PAGE 406
Camera To open the Camera application, tap Applications Key > Camera . Getting to know the viewfinder Camera Switch - Allows you to switch between the frontfacing and back-facing cameras. Zoom – Zoom in or zoom out. Alternatively you can use the Volume Keys. Brightness – This defines and controls of the amount of sunlight entering the lens. Slide the brightness indicator along the bar, towards “-” for a lower brightness image, or towards “+” for a higher brightness image.
PAGE 407
Settings – Tap this icon to open the settings menu. See Using the advanced settings on page 93. Video mode – Slide this icon down to switch to video mode. Taking a photo – Allows you to take a photo. Gallery – This enables you to access your saved photos and videos within the camera mode. Simply tap and your Gallery will appear on the screen. NOTE You can close all the shortcut options to give a clearer viewfinder screen. Just tap the center of the screen once. To recall the options, tap the screen again.
PAGE 408
Camera Taking a photo 1 From the Home screen, tap Camera. 2 Holding the phone horizontally, point the lens towards the subject you want to photograph. 3 Touch and hold the capture button lightly, and a focus box will appear in the center of the viewfinder screen. 4 Position the phone so you can see the subject in the focus box. 5 When the focus box turns green, the camera has focused on your subject. 6 Release the Capture button.
PAGE 409
Using the advanced settings NOTE Additional charges may apply when MMS messages are sent while roaming. Set as Tap to use the image as Contact icon or Wallpaper. Rename Tap to edit the name of the selected picture. Tap to delete the image. Tap to take another photo immediately. Your current photo will be saved. Tap to view the Gallery of your saved photos. In the viewfinder, tap to open the advanced options. You can change the camera settings by scrolling the list.
PAGE 410
Camera from the following options: 8M(3264X2448), W6M(3264X1836), 5M(2560X1920), 3M(2048X1536), W3M(2304X1296), 1M(1280X960), W1M(1536X864). Scene mode – Select the colour and light settings appropriate for the current environment. • Normal : Automatically adjusts according to the environment. • Portrait : It's good to capture people. • Landscape : It's good to capture natural scenery such as trees, flowers and sky. • Sports : It's good to capture sports scenery.
PAGE 411
5 sec, or 10 sec. This is ideal if you want to be included in a photo. Shot mode – Choose from Normal, Continuous shot, and Panorama. Shutter sound – Select one of the four shutter sounds. Auto review – If you set Auto review on, it will display the picture that was just taken automatically. Tag location – Activate to use your phone’s location-based services. Take pictures wherever you are and tag them with the location.
PAGE 412
Camera NOTE • When you exit the camera, some settings will return to their defaults. Check the camera settings before you take your next photo. • The settings menu is superimposed over the viewfinder, so when you change elements of the image colour or quality, you will see a preview of the image change behind the settings menu. Viewing your saved photos You can access your saved photos from within the camera mode. Just tap the Gallery button 96 and your Gallery will be displayed.
PAGE 413
Setting a photo as wallpaper 1 Tap the photo you want to set as wallpaper to open it. 2 Tap the screen to open the options menu. 3 Tap Menu > More > Set as > Wallpaper. 4 Crop the image as desired and tap Save.
PAGE 414
Video Camera Getting to know the viewfinder Camera Switch - Allows you to switch between the frontfacing and back-facing cameras. Zoom – Zoom in or zoom out.Alternatively you can use the Volume Keys. Brightness – This defines and controls of the amount of sunlight entering the lens. Slide the brightness indicator along the bar, towards “-” for a lower brightness video, or towards “+” for a higher brightness video. Flash – Allows you turn on the flash when recording video in a dark place.
PAGE 415
Settings – Tap this icon to open the settings menu. See Using the advanced settings on page 101. Camera mode – Slide this icon up to switch to camera mode. Start recording – Allows you to start recording. Gallery – This enables you to access your saved photos and videos from within the video camera mode. Simply tap and your Gallery will appear on the screen.
PAGE 416
Video Camera Recording a video 1 From the Home screen, tap Camera and slide the camera mode button to change to Video mode. The icon will change to . 2 The video camera’s viewfinder will appear on the screen. 3 Holding the phone horizontally, point the lens towards the subject of the video. 4 Tap the Record icon once to start recording. 5 REC will appear at the bottom of the viewfinder with a timer showing the length of the video. 100 6 Tap the Stop icon stop recording.
PAGE 417
Rename Tap to edit the name of the selected video. Tap to delete the video you just recorded. Tap OK to confirm it. The viewfinder will reappear. Tap to record another video right away. Your current video will be saved. Tap to view the Gallery of your saved videos. Using the advanced settings Using the viewfinder, tap advanced options. to open the Adjust the video camera settings by scrolling the list. After selecting the option, tap the Back key .
PAGE 418
Video Camera Colour effect – Choose a colour tone to use for your new video. Audio recording – Choose Mute to record a video without sound. Auto review – If you turn Auto review on, it will play back the video you just recorded automatically. – Restore all video camera default settings. – Tap whenever you want to know how a function operates. This will provide you a quick guide. 102 Watching your saved videos 1 In the viewfinder, tap . 2 Your Gallery will appear on the screen.
PAGE 419
Multimedia You can store multimedia files to a micro SD card to have easy access to all your image and video files. Gallery Tap the Applications Key > Gallery. View mode When you open the Gallery, your photos will be presented in Folder view. Once you open a folder, your photos will be in Grid view. When you tap a photo from Grid view, it will be displayed in Full view. Calendar View In Folder view, tap to change to the Calendar view.
PAGE 420
Multimedia Gallery menu options Tap a photo and tap the Menu Key to see the following available options: Share, Delete, and More. Tap More to access Details, Set as, Crop, Rotate Right and Rotate left. Sending a photo 1 To send a photo, touch and hold the photo you want. 2 Tap Share and choose from any of the available applications. 3 When you choose Email, Gmail or Messaging, your photo will be attached to a message, which you can then write and 104 send normally.
PAGE 421
Messaging, your video will be attached to Viewing a slideshow a message, which you can then write and send normally. To view a slideshow of your photos, open the Gallery and tap a photo. Once the photo is displayed, tap the screen to see the menu. Tap Slideshow to begin the slideshow of all your photos. Using an image Choose images to use as wallpaper or identify callers. 1 Touch and hold a photo, then tap More > Set as. 2 Choose from Contact icon or Wallpaper.
PAGE 422
Multimedia Transferring files using USB mass storage devices To transfer files using a USB device: 1 Connect the phone to a PC using a USB cable. 2 You can see USB connection mode popup. (From the Home screen, tap the Menu Key and tap Settings > Connectivity settings > USB connection mode > Mass storage.) 3 Tap Mass storage and OK to confirm. 4 You can view the phone content on your PC and transfer the files.
PAGE 423
How to save music/video files to the phone Connect your phone to the PC using the USB cable. You'll receive a notification that the USB is connected and can see USB connection mode popup. Tap Mass storage and OK. Then open the folder you wish to view from your computer. Save music or video files from the PC to the phone's removable storage. the phone's removable storage using a card reader. - If there is a video file with a subtitle file (.
PAGE 424
Multimedia How to play music/video files on the phone Playing music/video files Locate the file you want in the Gallery and tap it to play it. Playing a song 1 From the Home screen, tap the Applications Key and tap Music. 2 Tap the Songs tab. 3 Tap the song you want to play. 4 Tap to pause the song. 5 Tap to skip to the next song. 108 6 Tap to go back to the beginning of the song. Tap twice to go back to the previous song.
PAGE 425
the order you set or in a shuffle. Add to playlist or tapping Save as playlist to To create a playlist save all the songs in an album that you're playing as a playlist. 1 When viewing a list of songs in the library, touch and hold the first song you want to add to the new playlist. 2 Tap Add to playlist. 3 Tap New playlist. 4 Enter a name for the playlist, then tap Save. The new playlist is added to the Playlists library.
PAGE 426
Multimedia To rename or delete a playlist 1 Open the Playlist library. 2 Touch and hold the playlist to display the menu, then tap Delete or Rename. 110 NOTE Music file copyrights may be protected by international treaties and national copyright laws. Therefore, it may be necessary to obtain permission or a licence to reproduce or copy music. In some countries, national laws prohibit private copying of copyrighted material.
PAGE 427
Google Applications About Google applications Google applications, including mobile versions of Gmail, Google Talk, Google Calendar, and Google Maps, are loaded on your phone. 1 First, set up a Google account. Then enter your user name and password and sign in. 2 After signing in, your contacts, email, and calendar in your Google account will automatically synchronize with your phone. Google Maps™ To open Google Maps and view your location 1 From the Home screen, tap the Applications Key and tap Maps.
PAGE 428
Google Applications Tap the balloon to access additional options. To search for a location To view map, satellite, or traffic layers 1 While viewing a map, tap the Search field at the top of the screen. You can also tap the Menu Key and tap Search. 2 In the search box, enter the place you're looking for. You can enter an address, a city, or a type of business or establishment. For example, “theater in New York”. 3 Tap the Search icon. Markers with letter labels indicate search matches on the map.
PAGE 429
NOTE Location information might be inaccurate if GPS and Wi-Fi is turned off. Please make sure that GPS and Wi-Fi is turned on. Getting Directions To get directions 1 While viewing a map, tap the Menu Key and tap Directions. 2 Enter a starting point in the first text box and your destination in the second text box. To reverse directions, tap the Menu Key and tap Reverse Start & End. 3 Tap the icon for car, public transit, or walking directions. 4 Tap Get directions.
PAGE 430
Google Applications To search for locations along your route You can search for businesses, points of interest, and other features along your route. When you search while navigating, your results include locations along your route, rather than locations that are near your current location. Tap the Search Key and search for locations of interest. The results are displayed as markers along your route; the first result is labeled. You can tap a label for more information about the marker.
PAGE 431
To clear a map To join Latitude While viewing a map, tap the Menu Key and tap Clear Map. While viewing a map, tap the Menu Key Latitude Finding Your Friends with Google LatitudeTM Google Latitude lets you and your friends view each others' locations on maps and get directions to your friends' locations using Google Latitude. Your location is not shared automatically. It is by invitation only.
PAGE 432
Google Applications To invite friends to share their locations After you join Latitude, you can start sharing your location with your friends. Only friends whom you have explicitly invited or accepted can see your location. 1 Open Latitude, tap the Menu Key and tap Add friends. 2 Tap Select from Contacts or Add via email address in the menu that opens. 3 Tap Add friends at the bottom of the screen. If your friends already use Latitude, they receive an email request and a notification on Latitude.
PAGE 433
icon to your Home screen. Tip While viewing a map, tap the Menu Key > More for the following options: Labs, Cache Settings, Help, Terms, Privacy & Notices and About. Play Store™ Play Store™ lets you browse through and download thousands of fun and useful applications and games. You can check other users' comment regarding an application or you can post your own comments.
PAGE 434
Google Applications its details screen, or further sort the subcategory by tapping Top paid, Top free, Top Grossing, Top New paid, Top New Free, Trending. 4 Tap the application you desire to install. The descriptions and the prices of the application will be displayed. 5 Tap the price button at the top right of the screen for paid applications. For free applications, tap the FREE button. The applications will then be downloaded and installed.
PAGE 435
NOTE When you want to exit a game or application, use the Home or Back Key, which will return you to the Home screen. Or select Menu (or Options) within the game or application and select Exit. (Exit option may vary by game/application). Ending applications that continue to run in the background (after going back to the Home screen) will help conserve battery life and reduce unwanted data usage. Gmail™ Gmail™ can be configured when you first set up your phone.
PAGE 436
Google Applications screen within an account. Google Talk™ Google Talk™ is Google’s instant messaging program. It lets you communicate with other people who also use Google Talk™. Tap the Menu Key for the following available options. All friends – Displays all friends you can communicate with. Add friend – Send invitations to chat. Search – It searches for contacts to chat with or any chat records that contain the 120 word(s) you entered. – Sign out from chat.
PAGE 437
notification of each message that you receive in a chat and also to sound a ringtone or vibrate the phone. You can also configure Google Talk to sign you in automatically when you turn on your phone, and you can set whether the mobile indicator is displayed next to your name in other people's Friends lists. To configure notifications for new Google Talk messages 1 From the Friends list, tap the Menu Key then tap Settings.
PAGE 438
Google Applications friends see an outline of an AndroidTM next to your name in their Friends list when you are signed into Google Talk on an Android phone. To set whether you sign into Google Talk automatically 1 From the Friends list, tap the Menu Key , then tap Settings. 2 Checkmark or uncheck Automatically sign in. When Automatically sign in is checked, you are signed into Google Talk when you turn on your phone.
PAGE 439
Utilities Setting the alarm 1 From the Home screen, tap the Applications Key and tap Alarm/Clock. 2 To add a new alarm, tap the tab (if necessary). 3 Tap New alarm and set the alarm time. 4 Set any other desired options and tap Save. 5 Tap the Menu Key to add another alarm or adjust the alarm settings. 2 Tap the number keys to enter numbers. 3 For simple calculations, tap the function you want (+, –, x, or ÷), followed by =.
PAGE 440
Utilities Key and tap Calendar. 2 To view an event, tap the date. The events occurring on that date are displayed below the Calendar. Tap the event to view its details. If you want to add an event, tap at the top right corner of the Calendar. 3 Tap the What field and enter the event name. Check the date and enter the start and end time you want your event to begin and finish. 4 Tap the Where field to enter the location. 5 To add a note to your event, tap the Description field and enter the details.
PAGE 441
Polaris Office With Polaris Office, you can view, create and edit document files on your device. The loaded files can be from micro SD cards of your device, or from downloaded email attachments. The Polaris Office application supports the following file formats: txt, doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, pptx, pdf. Create a New Document 1 From the Home screen, tap the Applications Key > Polaris Office. 2 Register your name and email address on the User Registration page.
PAGE 442
Utilities View and edit a document on your device 1 From the Home screen, tap the Applications Key > Polaris Office. 2 Tap My Folders for folders and documents on your micro SD card. 3 Move to the folder that contains the file that you want to open if it is not in the root directory. Tap the document that you want to view or edit. 126 NOTE You can also open an attachment in an email by tapping the attachment in the message. 1 The document opens for you to view.
PAGE 443
zoom level you want.  Use the toolbar at the bottom of the screen to edit the document (Word, Excel, or PowerPoint file).  Tap the Menu Key for additional menu options such as Reflow text, Bookclip, Send file, and Setting 2 When you're finished editing, tap Save. Then, tap the Back Key to exit. Polaris Office document tools The Polaris Office application has a toolbar that appears automatically when you create a document.
PAGE 444
Utilities Manage documents online Voice Control 1 From the Home screen, tap the Applications Key > Polaris Office. 2 Tap Add account > Box.net for access to your online account. 3 Enter your Email account and password to access your account then tap Add. 4 View and manage your documents on the server as desired.
PAGE 445
Voice recorder Sending the voice recording Use the voice recorder to record voice memos or other audio files. 1 Once you have finished recording, you can send the audio clip. Tap Share. 2 Choose from Bluetooth, Wi-Fi share, Email, Gmail and Messaging. When you select Email, Gmail or Messaging, the voice recording will be added to a message that you can write and send normally. Recording a sound or voice 1 From the Home screen, tap the Applications Key and tap Voice Recorder.
PAGE 446
Utilities tab. The applications with high consumption of resource will have descriptions in red. Touch stop icon to terminate the applications. 2 You are allowed to see the installed applications by tapping on the Installed apps tab. 3 You are allowed to see the capacity of System memory and SD card by tapping the Storage tab. 4 You can place the App Manager widget on the homescreen and easily check the number of currently running applications.
PAGE 447
The Web Browser The Browser gives you a fast, full-colour world of games, music, news, sports, entertainment, and much more, right on your mobile phone. NOTE Additional charges apply when connecting to these services and downloading content. Check data charges with your network provider. < Tool bar > The icons bar on the screen below makes it easier to use the browser. The browser that allows you to look at webpages similarly to how you would on a computer. Back – Moves to the previous web page.
PAGE 448
The Web Using options Tap the Menu Key to view the following options: Read it later – To add the current web page in Read it later. Add RSS Feed – To add your favourite web page. When a new item appears on the web site, you are automatically notified with Google reader. 132 NOTE RSS (Really Simple Syndication) is a family of web feed formats used to publish frequently updated content, such as blog entries, news headlines or podcasts.
PAGE 449
Share page – Tap to share the web page. Find on page – Allows you to find text on the current web page. Select text – To select text on the web page. Highlight the text you want with your finger. The highlighted text is copied to the clipboard and you can paste it anywhere that allows text to be entered. More • Home page – To move to the Home page. • Set home page – To set the current page as your home page. • Add shortcut to home – Add the current page as shortcut to home screen.
PAGE 450
The Web Changing the Browser settings Tap 134 and set any desired options.
PAGE 451
On-Screen Phone LG On-Screen Phone 2.0 On-Screen Phone allows you to view your mobile phone screen from a PC via a USB, Bluetooth, or Wi-Fi connection. You can also control your mobile phone from your PC, using the mouse or keyboard. On-Screen Phone icons Connects your mobile phone to your PC, or disconnects it. Rotates the On-Screen Phone window (only available with applications that support rotation). Launches LG Home Panorama or changes the On-Screen Phone preferences.
PAGE 452
On-Screen Phone computer keyboard. - File transfer (mobile phone to PC): sends a File from your mobile phone (e.g. Gallery, Video Player, music and Polaris Office) to your PC. Simply right-click and drag to send a File to your PC. - File transfer (PC to mobile phone): sends files from your PC to your mobile phone. Simply select the files you wish to transfer and drag and drop into the on-Screen phone window. the files you send are stored on OSP folder.
PAGE 453
How to connect your mobile phone to your PC On-Screen Phone 2.0 provides USB, Bluetooth and Wi-Fi connection. Please follow the instruction on Connection Wizard of OSP program. NOTE Please make sure that On-Screen Phone check box in Settings > Connectivity > On-Screen Phone is selected. Please make sure that the battery may run out more quickly due to the current consumption if On-Screen Phone is connected via Wi-Fi.
PAGE 454
On-Screen Phone To check the phone-to-PC connection To disconnect your phone from your PC Once the devices have been connected, drag down the Status Bar at the top of the Home screen to check the On-Screen Phone connection status. Click in the top left of the On-Screen Phone window. Alternatively, drag down the Status Bar at the top of the Home screen and select "On-Screen Phone connected" > "Disconnect On-Screen Phone". Touch "Disconnect" in the disconnect dialog.
PAGE 455
Settings Wireless & networks This menu allows you to manage Wi-Fi and Bluetooth connections, portable hotspot and data tethering, airplane mode and VPN connections. To access this menu, from the Home Screen, tap Menu Key > Settings > Wireless & networks. Airplane mode Airplane mode allows you to quickly turn off all wireless connections. 1 From the Wireless & networks screen, tap the Airplane mode checkbox to turn it on (a blue checkmark will appear). 2 Tap again to turn it off.
PAGE 456
Settings key and touch Advanced. Wi-Fi Direct settings – Tick the check box to make Wi-Fi Direct active. Set Wi-Fi Direct device name and scan for other devices. Bluetooth – Turn the Bluetooth wireless feature on or off. Bluetooth settings - Device name: Set a Bluetooth name for your device. - Discoverable: Set your device to be visible to other Bluetooth devices. - Scan for devices: Set your device to be visible to other Bluetooth devices.
PAGE 457
forwarding, Additional settings, Send Messages, Call duration. Sound Adjust sound, notification default settings and vibrate mode. You can also manage audible and Haptic feedback. Silent mode - Checkmark this to silence all sounds except media and alarms. Vibrate - Set the option of whether to let the phone feedback you with vibration. Volume - Adjust the phone's volume settings to suit your needs and your environment. Phone ringtone - Select the ringtone for incoming calls.
PAGE 458
Settings keys and on certain user interface interactions. Display Brightness – Adjust the brightness of the screen. Auto-rotate rotation – Set to switch orientation automatically turns off. Screen optimization - Change the resolution size of downloaded applications to fit the screen size. Motion sensor calibration - Allows you to reset calibration for motion sensor. automatically when you rotate the phone. Animation – Set to allow animations.
PAGE 459
device. Mute - Checkmark this to mute the incoming call by flipping the phone over while the phone is ringing. Snooze (stop) - Checkmark this to snooze(stop) the alarm by flipping the phone over. Previous/Next item - Checkmark this to display a previous/next photo in Gallery by tapping on the left/right side of the phone. Pause - Checkmark this to pause the video by flipping the phone over.
PAGE 460
Settings pattern. You can set a PIN or Password instead of a Pattern or leave it as None. When you turn on your phone or wake up the screen, you're prompted to draw your unlock pattern to unlock the screen. Screen lock timer - Set the amount of idle time before the screen lock is enabled. Set up SIM card lock – Set up SIM card lock or change SIM PIN. Visible passwords – select to show passwords as you type them or deselect to hide passwords as you type them.
PAGE 461
follow the process below. Tap the Menu Key , tap Settings > Location & security > Set up screen lock and select between Pattern, PIN or Password. Warning Take precautions when using an Unlock Pattern, PIN, or Password. It is very important that you remember the screen unlock information you set. You are allowed 5 attempts to enter your screen unlock information. If you used up all 5 opportunities, you will have to wait 30 seconds to attempt unlocking the phone again.
PAGE 462
Settings Caution If you perform a hard reset, all user applications and user data will be deleted. Please remember to back up any important data before performing a hard reset. 1 Turn the power off. 2 Press and hold the following keys at the same time for 8 seconds: Power/Lock Key + Down Volume Key. 3 When FACTORY HARD RESET screen is displayed, release the keys. 4 Press the Power/Lock Key to confirm -delete all user data, and press the Volume 146 Keys to cancel.
PAGE 463
To protect your phone and personal data, only download applications from trusted sources such as Play Store. Manage Applications – Manage and remove installed applications. Running services - Check currently running services. Storage use – View storage used by applications. Battery use – See what has been using the battery. Development – Set options for application development. Accounts & sync Allows you to enable Background data, Autosync and synchronize or add new accounts.
PAGE 464
Settings Language & keyboard NOTE Select language and customize the input method and keyboard settings. Requires additional plug-ins to become selectable. Voice input & output Connectivity settings Set Voice recognizer settings and use the Textto-Speech settings to configure the Android text-to-speech synthesiser, for applications that can take advantage of it.
PAGE 465
Date & time Set date, time, time zone and date and time formats. About phone View legal information, check phone status and software versions, and perform the software update.
PAGE 466
Software Update Phone Software Update may seriously damage your mobile phone. This feature allows you to update the firmware of your phone to the latest version conveniently from the internet without the need to visit a service center. For more information on how to use this function, please visit: http://www.lg.
PAGE 467
the bottom of the list. To perform the phone software update, tap the Menu Key > Settings > About phone > Software update > Check now for update. NOTE LG reserves the right to firmware updates available only for selected models at its own discretion and does not guarantee the availability of the newer version of the firmware for all handset models.
PAGE 468
Copyrights and trademarks Notice: Open Source Software To obtain the corresponding source code under GPL, LGPL, MPL and other open source licences, please visit http://opensource.lge.com/ All referred licence terms, disclaimers and notices are available for download with the source code. DivX Mobile ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX 152 Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit divx.
PAGE 469
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content. DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license. Dolby Mobile Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
PAGE 470
Accessories These accessories are available for use with the LG-P936. (Items described below may be optional.) Travel adaptor Data cable Connect your LG-P936 and PC. User Guide Stereo headset Learn more about your LG-P936. NOTE: - Always use genuine LG accessories. Failure to do this may invalidate your warranty. - Accessories may vary in different regions.
PAGE 471
Technical data Ambient Temperatures Max: +55°C (discharging), +45°C (charging) Min: -10°C Declaration of Conformity Suppliers Details Name LG Electronics Inc Address LG Twin Tower 20,Yeouido-dong, Yeongdeungpo-gu Seoul, Korea 150-721 Product Details Product Name GSM 850 / E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Quad Band , WCDMA and LTE Terminal Equipment Model Name LG-P936 Trade Name LG Applicable Standards Details R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC EN 301 489-01 V1.8.1 / EN 301 489-7 V 1.3.1/ EN 301 489-17 V 2.1.
PAGE 472
Troubleshooting This chapter lists some problems you might encounter while using your phone. Some problems require you to call your service provider, but most are easy to fix yourself. Message SIM error No network connection/ Losing network 156 Possible causes There is no SIM card in the phone or it is inserted incorrectly. Signal is weak or you are outside the carrier network. Operator applied new services. Possible corrective measures Make sure that the SIM card is correctly inserted.
PAGE 473
Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures To change a security code, you will need to confirm the new code Codes do not by re-entering it. If you forget the code, contact your service provider. match The two codes you have entered do not match. Any Not supported by application service provider or Contact your service provider. cannot be set registration required.
PAGE 474
Troubleshooting Message Possible causes Dialing error New SIM card Calls not inserted. available Pre-paid charge limit reached. On/Off key pressed too briefly. Phone Battery is not cannot be charged. switched on Battery contacts are dirty. 158 Possible corrective measures New network not authorised. Check for new restrictions. Contact service provider or reset limit with PIN2. Press the On/Off key down for at least two seconds. Charge battery. Check charging indicator on the display.
PAGE 475
Message Charging error Possible causes Possible corrective measures Battery is not charged. Outside temperature is too hot or cold. Contact problem Charge battery. Make sure phone is charging at a normal temperature. Check the charger and connection to the phone. Check the battery contacts and clean them if necessary. Plug the charger into a different socket. If the charger does not warm up, replace it. Only use original LG accessories. Replace battery.
PAGE 476
Troubleshooting 160 Message Possible causes Number not permitted Impossible to receive / send SMS & picture Files not opening SD card not working The Fixed dialling Check the Settings menu and turn the function off. number function is on. Memory full Unsupported file format FAT16, FAT32 file system supported Possible corrective measures Delete some messages from the phone. Check the file formats that can be supported. Check SD card file system via card reader, or format SD card using the phone.
PAGE 477
Message Possible causes The screen does not turn Proximity sensor on when I problem receive a call. No sound Hang up or freeze Possible corrective measures If you use any protection tape or case, check to see if it has covered the area around the proximity sensor. Make sure that the area around the proximity sensor is clean. Check the settings status of the sound menu to make sure you are not in vibrate or silent mode. Remove the battery, insert it again and switch on the Intermittent software phone.
PAGE 478
Troubleshooting Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures 1. Turn the phone off. 2. Remove the battery cover. Phone locked and does not Restarting the phone 3. Install the battery. function. 4. Close the cover. 5. Turn the phone on again.
PAGE 479
PAGE 480
PAGE 481
PAGE 482